SINAMICS S120 Chassis Power Units Liquid Cooled en-US

Liquid-cooled chassis power units
Introduction 1
Fundamental safety
instructions 2
3
SINAMICS System overview
Line-side power
components 4
S120
Liquid-cooled chassis power units 5
Power Modules
Line Modules 6
Equipment Manual
Motor Modules 7
Motor-side power
components 8
Cabinet design and EMC 9

Cooling circuit, coolant
properties and protection 10
against condensation
Maintenance and servicing 11
Appendix A
04/2021
6SL3097-4AM00-0BP9
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Document order number: 6SL3097-4AM00-0BP9 Copyright © Siemens AG 2006 - 2021.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 05/2021 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 The SINAMICS converter family ............................................................................................ 9
1.2 Usage phases and their documents/tools (as an example)................................................... 12
1.3 Where can the various topics be found? ............................................................................. 13
1.4 Training and support.......................................................................................................... 14
1.5 Directives, standards, certificates ....................................................................................... 14
1.6 Additional information ....................................................................................................... 16
1.7 General Data Protection Regulation .................................................................................... 18
2 Fundamental safety instructions ......................................................................................................... 19
2.1 General safety instructions ................................................................................................. 19
2.2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)..................................................................... 25
2.3 Industrial security .............................................................................................................. 26
2.4 Residual risks of power drive systems ................................................................................. 27
3 System overview ................................................................................................................................. 29
3.1 The SINAMICS range of drives ............................................................................................ 29
3.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system .............................................................................................. 33
3.3 Technical specifications ..................................................................................................... 36
3.4 Derating factors ................................................................................................................. 39
3.4.1 Derating factors as a function of coolant temperature ........................................................ 39
3.4.2 Derating factors as a function of the ambient temperature ................................................. 40
3.4.3 Derating factors as a function of installation altitude .......................................................... 41
3.5 Standards .......................................................................................................................... 43
3.6 Basic structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 .................................... 46
3.6.1 Structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 Power Modules.................... 46
3.6.2 Structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 and regulated infeed ........... 47
3.6.3 Structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 and unregulated infeed ....... 48
4 Line-side power components .............................................................................................................. 49
4.1 Line reactors for Power Modules ........................................................................................ 49
4.1.1 Description ........................................................................................................................ 49
4.1.2 Safety information ............................................................................................................. 49
4.1.3 Dimension drawing............................................................................................................ 51
4.1.4 Technical data ................................................................................................................... 52
4.2 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules ................................................................................... 53
4.2.1 Description ........................................................................................................................ 53

Equipment Manual, 04/2021, 6SL3097-4AM00-0BP9 3
Table of contents

4.2.4 Technical data ................................................................................................................... 57
4.3 Active Interface Modules, air-cooled................................................................................... 58
4.3.1 Description ........................................................................................................................ 58
4.3.3 Interface description .......................................................................................................... 62
4.3.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 62
4.3.3.2 Connection example .......................................................................................................... 64
4.3.3.3 Motor circuit breaker -Q101 ............................................................................................... 66
4.3.3.4 Line/load connection ......................................................................................................... 66
4.3.3.5 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500 ................................................................................................. 67
4.3.3.6 X530 neutral point grounding ............................................................................................ 67
4.3.3.7 X609 terminal strip ............................................................................................................ 68
4.3.3.8 Meaning of the LED on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) in the Active Interface
Module .............................................................................................................................. 69
4.3.5 Electrical connection.......................................................................................................... 72
4.3.6 Technical data ................................................................................................................... 76
4.3.7 Derating factors as a function of installation altitude and ambient temperature .................. 78
4.3.8 Parameterization ............................................................................................................... 79
4.4 Active Interface Modules, liquid-cooled .............................................................................. 80
4.4.1 Description ........................................................................................................................ 80
4.4.3 Interface description .......................................................................................................... 84
4.4.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 84
4.4.3.2 Connection example .......................................................................................................... 86
4.4.3.3 Line/load connection ......................................................................................................... 88
4.4.3.4 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500 ................................................................................................. 89
4.4.3.5 X530 neutral point grounding ............................................................................................ 89
4.4.3.6 X609 terminal strip ............................................................................................................ 90
4.4.3.7 X1 temperature sensor connection at the filter reactor ....................................................... 90
Module .............................................................................................................................. 91
4.4.5 Installation ........................................................................................................................ 94
4.4.6 Notes on installation in a control cabinet............................................................................ 95
4.4.7 Cooling circuit connections .............................................................................................. 105
4.4.8 Electrical connection........................................................................................................ 107
4.4.9 Technical data ................................................................................................................. 111
4.4.9.1 Parameterization ............................................................................................................. 114
5 Power Modules .................................................................................................................................. 115
5.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 115
5.2 Safety information ........................................................................................................... 117
5.3 Interface description ........................................................................................................ 119
5.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 119
5.3.2 Connection example ........................................................................................................ 121
5.3.3 Line/DC link/motor connection ......................................................................................... 122
5.3.4 X9 terminal strip .............................................................................................................. 122
5.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection ............................................................ 123

4 Equipment Manual, 04/2021, 6SL3097-4AM00-0BP9
Table of contents
5.3.6 X42 terminal strip ............................................................................................................ 124

5.3.7 X46 Brake control and monitoring.................................................................................... 125
5.3.8 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402 ......................................................................... 125
5.3.10 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module ...................... 127
5.4 Dimension drawing.......................................................................................................... 128
5.5 Installation ...................................................................................................................... 130
5.6 Electrical connection ........................................................................................................ 133
5.7 Technical specifications ................................................................................................... 134
5.7.1 Power Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V .................................................................................. 134
5.7.2 Overload capability .......................................................................................................... 135
5.7.3 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency....................................................... 137
6 Line Modules ..................................................................................................................................... 139
6.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 139
6.2 Basic Line Modules........................................................................................................... 140
6.2.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 140
6.2.2 Safety information ........................................................................................................... 142
6.2.3 Interface description ........................................................................................................ 145
6.2.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 145
6.2.3.2 Connection example ........................................................................................................ 147
6.2.3.3 Line/load connection........................................................................................................ 148
6.2.3.4 X9 terminal strip .............................................................................................................. 148
6.2.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection............................................................. 149
6.2.3.6 X42 terminal strip ............................................................................................................ 150
6.2.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402 ......................................................................... 151
6.2.3.8 Cooling circuit connections .............................................................................................. 151
6.2.3.9 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module ................ 152
6.2.4 Dimension drawing.......................................................................................................... 153
6.2.5 Installation ...................................................................................................................... 155
6.2.6 Electrical connection ........................................................................................................ 157
6.2.7 Technical specifications ................................................................................................... 159
6.2.7.1 Basic Line Modules, 380 ... 480 V 3 AC ............................................................................. 159
6.2.7.2 Basic Line Modules, 500 ... 690 V 3 AC ............................................................................. 161
6.2.7.3 Overload capability .......................................................................................................... 163
6.3 Active Line Modules ......................................................................................................... 164
6.3.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 164
6.3.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 171
6.3.3.2 Connection example ........................................................................................................ 174
6.3.3.3 Line/load connection........................................................................................................ 175
6.3.3.4 X9 terminal strip .............................................................................................................. 175
6.3.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection............................................................. 176
6.3.3.6 X42 terminal strip ............................................................................................................ 178
6.3.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402 ......................................................................... 178
6.3.3.8 Cooling circuit connections .............................................................................................. 179
6.3.3.9 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module............... 180

Table of contents
6.3.5 Installation ...................................................................................................................... 185

6.3.6 Technical specifications ................................................................................................... 188
6.3.6.1 Active Line Modules, 380 ... 480 V 3 AC ........................................................................... 188
6.3.6.2 Active Line Modules, 500 ... 690 V 3 AC ........................................................................... 192
6.3.6.3 Overload capability .......................................................................................................... 196
7 Motor Modules .................................................................................................................................. 197
7.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 197
7.2 Safety information ........................................................................................................... 199
7.3 Interface description ........................................................................................................ 201
7.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 201
7.3.2 Connection example ........................................................................................................ 205
7.3.3 DC link/motor connection ................................................................................................ 206
7.3.4 X9 terminal strip .............................................................................................................. 206
7.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection ............................................................ 207
7.3.6 X42 terminal strip ............................................................................................................ 209
7.3.7 X46 Brake control and monitoring.................................................................................... 209
7.3.8 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402 ......................................................................... 210
7.3.10 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module ...................... 211
7.4 Dimension drawing.......................................................................................................... 212
7.5 Installation ...................................................................................................................... 217
7.6 Technical specifications ................................................................................................... 220
7.6.1 Motor Modules 510 V ... 720 V DC (line voltage, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V) ................................. 220
7.6.2 Motor Modules 675 V ... 1035 V DC (line voltage, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V) ............................... 226
7.6.3 Overload capability .......................................................................................................... 234
7.6.4 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency....................................................... 236
7.6.5 Parallel connection of Motor Modules .............................................................................. 238
8 Motor-side power components ......................................................................................................... 241
8.1 Sine-wave filter................................................................................................................ 241
8.1.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 241
8.1.4 Technical data ................................................................................................................. 245
8.2 Motor reactors ................................................................................................................. 246
8.2.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 246
8.2.4 Technical data ................................................................................................................. 252
8.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter ................................................................................ 255
8.3.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 255
8.3.4 Connecting the dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter ........................................................ 261
8.3.5 Dimension drawing, dv/dt reactor .................................................................................... 263
8.3.6 Dimension drawing of the voltage peak limiter................................................................. 266
8.3.7 Technical data ................................................................................................................. 269

Table of contents
8.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter .................................................................. 272
8.4.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 272
8.4.4 Connecting the dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter .......................................... 279
8.4.5 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter ............................... 282
8.4.6 Technical data ................................................................................................................. 287
9 Cabinet design and EMC .................................................................................................................... 291
9.1 Notes .............................................................................................................................. 291
9.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 291
9.1.3 Directives ........................................................................................................................ 293
9.2 EMC-compliant design and control cabinet configuration ................................................. 293
9.3 Cabinet installation, vertical and horizontal installation .................................................... 294
9.3.1 Vertical installation .......................................................................................................... 294
9.3.1.1 Mounting on mounting rails ............................................................................................ 295
9.3.1.2 Volumetric air flow and fans required ............................................................................... 299
9.3.2 Horizontal installation ...................................................................................................... 301
9.3.2.1 Housing for air guidance .................................................................................................. 301
9.3.2.2 Motor connection cover ................................................................................................... 302
9.3.2.3 Volumetric air flow and fans required ............................................................................... 302
9.3.3 Coolant connection.......................................................................................................... 303
10 Cooling circuit, coolant properties and protection against condensation ........................................ 305
10.1 Cooling circuits ................................................................................................................ 305
10.1.1 Cooling circuit for aluminium heat sinks ........................................................................... 308
10.1.2 Cooling circuit for stainless steel heat sinks ...................................................................... 310
10.1.3 Preventing cavitation ....................................................................................................... 311
10.1.4 Cooling circuit configuring information ............................................................................ 312
10.1.5 Equipotential bonding ..................................................................................................... 327
10.2 Coolant definition ............................................................................................................ 328
10.2.1 Coolant properties ........................................................................................................... 328
10.2.2 Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors ......................................................................................... 330
10.3 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 333
10.4 Anti-condensation measures ............................................................................................ 334
10.5 Examples of coolant control ............................................................................................. 335
10.6 Connection methods ....................................................................................................... 339
10.7 Commissioning ................................................................................................................ 340
10.8 Service ............................................................................................................................ 342
11 Maintenance and servicing ............................................................................................................... 343
11.1 Chapter content............................................................................................................... 343
11.2 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 343
11.3 Servicing ......................................................................................................................... 345

Table of contents
11.4 Replacing components..................................................................................................... 346

11.4.2 Messages after replacement of DRIVE-CLiQ components................................................... 346
11.4.3 Mounting equipment for power units............................................................................... 347
11.4.4 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Power Module, frame size FL .............................. 349
11.4.5 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Power Module, frame size GL.............................. 351
11.4.6 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Motor Module, frame size FXL ............................ 353
11.4.7 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Active Line Module and Motor Module, frame
size GXL........................................................................................................................... 356
size HXL........................................................................................................................... 358
size JXL............................................................................................................................ 360
11.4.10 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Motor Module, frame size JXL 6SL3325-
1TG41-6AP3 .................................................................................................................... 363
11.4.11 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size FBL ....................... 368
11.4.12 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size GBL ...................... 370
11.4.13 Replacing the electronic fan, Power Module, frame size FL ............................................... 373
11.4.14 Replacing the electronic fan, Power Module, frame size GL ............................................... 376
11.4.15 Replacing the electronic fan, Motor Module, frame size FXL ............................................. 379
11.4.16 Replacing the electronic fan, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame size GXL ....... 382
11.4.17 Replacing the electronic fan, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame size HXL ....... 385
11.4.18 Replacing the electronic fan, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame size JXL ........ 388
11.4.19 Replacing the electronic fan, Basic Line Module, frame size FBL ........................................ 391
11.4.20 Replacing the electronic fan, Basic Line Module, frame size GBL........................................ 394
11.4.21 Replacing the electronic fan of the Control Interface Module ............................................ 397
11.4.22 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size GI ................................................. 399
11.4.23 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size HI ................................................. 401
11.5 Forming the DC link capacitors ......................................................................................... 403
11.6 Recycling and disposal ..................................................................................................... 406
A Appendix ........................................................................................................................................... 407
A.1 Cable lugs........................................................................................................................ 407
A.2 List of abbreviations......................................................................................................... 409
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 417

Introduction 1
1.1 The SINAMICS converter family
With the SINAMICS converter family, you can solve any individual drive task in the low-
voltage, medium-voltage and DC voltage range. From converters to motors and controllers,
all Siemens drive components are perfectly matched to each other and can be easily
integrated into your existing automation system. With SINAMICS you are prepared for
digitization. You benefit from highly efficient engineering with a variety of tools for the entire
product development and production process. And you also save space in the control cabinet
– thanks to the integrated safety technology.
You can find additional information about SINAMICS at the following address
(http://www.siemens.com/sinamics).
SINAMICS documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in the following categories:
• General documentation/catalogs
• User documentation
• Manufacturer/service documentation
Standard scope
The scope of the functionality described in this document can differ from that of the drive
system that is actually supplied.
• Other functions not described in this documentation might be able to be executed in the
drive system. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions
when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of service.
• The documentation can also contain descriptions of functions that are not available in a
particular product version of the drive system. Please refer to the ordering documentation
only for the functionality of the supplied drive system.
• Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be documented by the
machine manufacturer.
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information
about all of the product types, and cannot take into consideration every conceivable type of
installation, operation and service/maintenance.

Introduction
Target group
This documentation is intended for machine manufacturers, commissioning engineers, and
service personnel who use the SINAMICS drive system.
Benefits
This manual provides all of the information, procedures and operator actions required for the
particular usage phase.
Siemens MySupport/Documentation
You can find information on how to create your own individual documentation based on
Siemens content and adapt it for your own machine documentation at the following address
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Additional information
You can find information on the following topics at the following address
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108993276):
• Ordering documentation / overview of documentation
• Additional links to download documents
• Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
Drive Technology Configurator

2D dimension drawings and 3D CAD models are available in the Drive Technology
Configurator at the following address (www.siemens.com/dt-configurator).
Questions relating to the technical documentation

Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following email address
(mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com).
FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions under Product Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/ps/faq).

Introduction
Siemens Support for on the move

With the "Siemens Industry Online Support" app, you can access more than 300,000
documents for Siemens Industry products – any time and from anywhere. The App supports
you in the following areas:
• Resolving problems when executing a project
• Troubleshooting when faults develop
• Expanding a system or planning a new system
Further, you have access to the Technical Forum and other articles that our experts have
drawn-up:
• FAQs
• Application examples
• Manuals
• Certificates
• Product announcements and much more
The App "Siemens Industry Online Support" is available for Apple iOS and Android.
Data matrix code data on the rating plate

The data matrix code on the rating plate contains the specific device data. This code can be
read-in with any Smartphone and technical information for the appropriate device can be
displayed via the "Industry Online Support" Mobile App.
Web sites of third-party companies

This document includes hyperlinks to web sites of third-party companies Siemens accepts no
responsibility for the content of these web sites, nor does it use these web sites and their
content for its own use, as Siemens cannot check these web sites and is also not responsible
for the content and information provided on them. The user uses these web sites at his own
risk.

Introduction
1.2 Usage phases and their documents/tools (as an example)
1.2 Usage phases and their documents/tools (as an example)
Usage phase Tools

Orientation SINAMICS S sales documentation
Planning/engineering • SIZER engineering tool
• SINAMICS Low Voltage Configuration Manual
• Configuration manuals, motors
Decision mak- SINAMICS S120 catalogs
ing/ordering
• SINAMICS S120 and SIMOTICS (Catalog D 21.4)
• SINAMICS Converters for Single-Axis Drives – Built-In Units (D 31.1)
• SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules, SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet
Units (catalog D 21.3)
Configur- • SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Control Units and Supplementary System Components
ing/installation
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Booksize Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Booksize Power Units C/D Type
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Air-Cooled Chassis Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Liquid-Cooled Chassis Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual water-cooled chassis power units for common cooling
circuits
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for AC Drives
• SINAMICS S120M Equipment Manual for Distributed Drive Technology
Commissioning • STARTER Commissioning Tool
• SINAMICS S120 Getting Started
• SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
• SINAMICS S120 Safety Integrated Function Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Communication Function Manual
• SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
Using/operating • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
Maintenance/Service • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
List of references • SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
You can find SINAMICS S120 documentation on the Internet at the following address
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13231/man).

Introduction
1.3 Where can the various topics be found?
1.3 Where can the various topics be found?
Software Manual
Alarms Described in order of ascending numbers SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
Parameters Described in order of ascending numbers SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
Function block Sorted according to topic SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
diagrams Described in order of ascending numbers
Drive functions SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
Communication topics SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Communication2)
Safety Integrated Basic and Extended Functions SINAMICS S120 Safety Integrated Function Manual
Basic Functions SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
Commissioning Of a simple SINAMICS S120 drive with Getting Started1)
STARTER
Commissioning With STARTER SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual1)
Commissioning Of a simple SINAMICS S120 drive with Getting Started2)
Startdrive
Commissioning With Startdrive SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual2)
Web server SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
Hardware Manual
Control Units and expansion components SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Control Units and
Supplementary System Components
Booksize power units SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Booksize Power Units
Chassis power units SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Chassis Power Units,
Air-cooled
SINAMICS S120 Manual for Chassis Power Units, liquid
cooled
SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Chassis Power Units,
Water-cooled for common cooling circuits
AC drive components SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for AC Drives
S120 Combi components SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual Combi
Diagnostics via STARTER SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual1)
LEDs Startdrive SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual2)
Meaning of the LEDs Equipment Manuals
High Frequency Drive components SINAMICS S120 System Manual High Frequency Drives
1) Up to firmware version 5.1 SP1
2) From firmware version 5.2

Introduction
1.4 Training and support
1.4 Training and support
Training
At the following address (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain), you can find information about
SITRAIN (Siemens training on products, systems and solutions for automation and drives).
Technical support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided in the Internet at the
following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/4868) in the "Contact"
area.
1.5 Directives, standards, certificates
Relevant directives and standards

You can obtain an up-to-date list of currently certified components on request from your local
Siemens office. If you have any questions relating to certifications that have not yet been
completed, please ask your Siemens contact person.
Certificates for download

The certificates can be downloaded from the Internet:
Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/ps/13206/cert)
EC declaration of conformity
You can find the EC Declaration of Conformity for the relevant directives as well as the
relevant certificates, prototype test certificates, manufacturers declarations and test
certificates for functions relating to functional safety ("Safety Integrated") on the Internet at
the following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13231/cert).
The following directives and standards are relevant for SINAMICS S devices:
• European Low Voltage Directive
SINAMICS S devices fulfil the requirements stipulated in the Low-Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU, insofar as they are covered by the application area of this directive.
• European Machinery Directive
SINAMICS S devices fulfil the requirements stipulated in the Low-Voltage Directive
2006/42/EC, insofar as they are covered by the application area of this directive.
However, the use of the SINAMICS S devices in a typical machine application has been
fully assessed for compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health
and safety.

Introduction
1.5 Directives, standards, certificates
• Directive 2011/65/EU
SINAMICS S devices comply with the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU on the
restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices
(RoHS II).
• European EMC Directive
SINAMICS S devices comply with the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.
• Requirements for the UK market
SINAMICS S devices with the UKCA marking on the nameplate satisfy the requirements for
the UK market (England, Wales and Scotland).
• EMC requirements for South Korea
SINAMICS S devices with the KC marking on the type plate satisfy the EMC requirements
for South Korea.
• Eurasian conformity
SINAMICS S devices comply with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/Kazakhstan
customs union (EAC).
• North American market
SINAMICS S devices with one of the test symbols displayed fulfill the requirements
stipulated for the North American market as a component of drive applications.
You can find the relevant certificates on the Internet pages of the certifiers
(http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html).
• Specification for semiconductor process equipment voltage drop immunity
SINAMICS S devices meet the requirements of standard SEMI F47-0706.
• Australia and New Zealand (RCM formerly C-Tick)
SINAMICS S devices showing the test symbols fulfill the EMC requirements for Australia
and New Zealand.
• Quality systems
Siemens AG employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of
ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.

Introduction
1.6 Additional information
Standards that are not relevant
China Compulsory Certification

SINAMICS S devices do not fall in the area of validity of the China Compulsory Certification
(CCC).
You can find detailed information at: "Certificates for export to China
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/46382761)".
For individual parts that are subject to CCC but are supplied as spare parts, negative
certificates are required instead of certificates for shipment to China.
These are required anew for each individual delivery and are to be applied for by the exporter
at the following address (http://www.china-certification.com).
EMC limit values for South Korea
The mandatory EMC limits for Korea correspond to the limits of EN 61800-3 (EMC product
standard for adjustable speed electrical drive systems) for category C2 or to limit class A,
Group 1 according to EN 55011.
Compliance with the limits according to category C2 or class A, group 1 is achieved with
suitable additional measures. Further, additional measures may be required, such as using an
additional radio interference suppression filter (EMC filter).
The measures for EMC-compliant design of the system are described in detail in this manual
and in the "SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual".
The final statement regarding compliance with the standard is always specified by the
respective label attached to the individual unit.
Information on product-related environmental protection

You can find additional information about product-related environmental protection at the
following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/39200038).
Ensuring reliable operation

The manual describes a desired state which, if maintained, ensures the required level of
operational reliability and compliance with EMC limit values.
Should there be any deviation from the requirements in the equipment manual, appropriate
actions (e.g. measurements) must be taken to check/prove that the required level of
operational reliability and compliance with EMC limit values are ensured.

Introduction
Spare parts
Spare parts are available on the Internet at the following address
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/de/en/sc/2110).
Product maintenance
The components are subject to continuous further development within the scope of product
maintenance (improvements to robustness, discontinuations of components, etc.).
These further developments are "spare parts-compatible" and do not change the article
number.
In the scope of such spare parts-compatible further developments, connector/connection
positions are sometimes changed slightly. This does not cause any problems with proper use
of the components. Please take this fact into consideration in special installation situations
(e.g. allow sufficient clearance for the cable length).
Use of third-party products

This document contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens accepts
the fundamental suitability of these third-party products.
You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third-party products.
Ground symbols
Table 1- 1 Symbols
Icon Meaning
Connection for protective conductor
Ground (e.g. M 24 V)
Connection for function potential bonding

Introduction
1.7 General Data Protection Regulation
1.7 General Data Protection Regulation
Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation

Siemens respects the principles of data protection, in particular the data minimization rules
(privacy by design).
For this product, this means:
The product does not process neither store any person-related data, only technical function
data (e.g. time stamps). If the user links these data with other data (e.g. shift plans) or if he
stores person-related data on the same data medium (e.g. hard disk), thus personalizing
these data, he has to ensure compliance with the applicable data protection stipulations.

Fundamental safety instructions 2
2.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or serious injury.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any of
the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other hazardous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, water.
Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse
sequence.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high
impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or
tripping too late, and thus causing electric shock or a fire.
• In the case of a conductor-conductor or conductor-ground short-circuit, ensure that the
short-circuit current at the point where the converter is connected to the line supply at
least meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used.

Fundamental safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low
impedance
Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to
interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and thus causing electric shock or
a fire.
• Ensure that the prospective short-circuit current at the line terminal of the converter
does not exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.
WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when
touched, can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may
carry a hazardous voltage that might result in serious injury or death.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the
electronics modules.
WARNING
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Improper handling may cause damage to equipment. For damaged devices, hazardous
voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components; if touched, this can
result in death or severe injury.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged devices.
WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the cores of power cables that are not used
(e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.

WARNING
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Opening a plug connection when a system is in operation can result in arcing that may
cause serious injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.
WARNING
Electric shock due to residual charges in power components
Because of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the
power supply has been switched off. Contact with live parts can result in death or serious
injury.
• Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no-voltage condition and
start work.
NOTICE
Damage to equipment due to unsuitable tightening tools.
Unsuitable tightening tools or fastening methods can damage the screws of the equipment.
• Be sure to only use screwdrivers which exactly match the heads of the screws.
• Tighten the screws with the torque specified in the technical documentation.
• Use a torque wrench or a mechanical precision nut runner with a dynamic torque sensor
and speed limitation system.
NOTICE
Property damage due to loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can
result in damage due to fire, device defects, or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque.
• Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.

WARNING
Spread of fire from built-in devices
In the event of fire outbreak, the enclosures of built-in devices cannot prevent the escape of
fire and smoke. This can result in serious injury or material damage.
• Install built-in units in a suitable metal cabinet in such a way that personnel are
protected against fire and smoke, or take other appropriate measures to protect
personnel.
• Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.
WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Converters generate electromagnetic fields (EMF) during operation. Electromagnetic fields
may interfere with active implants, e.g. pacemakers. People with active implants in the
immediate vicinity of systems are at risk.
• As the operator of an EMF-emitting installation, assess the individual risks of persons
with active implants.
• Observe the data on EMF emission provided in the product documentation.
WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by radio devices or mobile phones
Using radio devices or mobile telephones in the immediate vicinity of the components can
result in equipment malfunction. Malfunctions may impair the functional safety of machines
and can therefore put people in danger or lead to property damage.
• Therefore, if you move closer than 20 cm to the components, be sure to switch off radio
devices or mobile telephones.
• Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support App" only on equipment that has already been
switched off.
WARNING
Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages
When operated on systems with grounded line conductor or in the event of a ground fault
in the IT line system, the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage to ground.
If you use motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line
conductors, you must perform the following measures:
• IT system: Use a ground fault monitor and eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
• TN or TT systems with grounded line conductor: Use an isolating transformer on the line
side.

WARNING
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent
fire and smoke. This can cause serious injury or even death. This can also result in increased
failures and shorter service lives for devices/systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the
respective component.
NOTICE
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
The device may overheat and therefore be damaged if mounted in an inadmissible position.
• Only operate the device in admissible mounting positions.
WARNING
Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels
Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized
dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language.
• Replace illegible warning labels.
NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.

WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before
commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system,
including all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted
and activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Run a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.
Note
Important safety instructions for Safety Integrated functions
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the safety instructions in
the Safety Integrated manuals.

2.2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)
2.2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules
or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Damage through electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual
components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g. conductive foam rubber of
aluminum foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table
with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).

2.3 Industrial security
2.3 Industrial security

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Products and solutions from Siemens constitute one element of such a
concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the Internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. using firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on Industrial Security measures that can be implemented, please
visit:
Industrial Security (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they
become available, and that only the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions
that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s
exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed at:
Siemens Industrial Security RSS feed
(https://new.siemens.com/global/en/products/services/cert.html#Subscriptions).
Additional information is provided on the Internet:
Industrial security Configuration Manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/108862708)
WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states
in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a state-of-the-art, integrated
industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the integrated industrial security
concept.
• Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
• Once commissioning has been completed, carefully check all security-related settings.

2.4 Residual risks of power drive systems

When assessing the machine or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local
regulations (e.g. EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system installer must
take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive
components of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of the driven machine or system components during
commissioning, operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example:
– Hardware and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators and cables
and connections
– Response times of the controller and drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive pollution
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic
components
– External influence/damage
– X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures - including open flames - as well as the emission of light, noise,
particles, gases, etc. can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions
caused by, for example:
– Component malfunctions
– Software errors
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component malfunctions
– Influence of electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Condensation/conductive pollution
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to
people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc. if they are too close.
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly
6. Influence of network-connected communication systems, e.g. ripple-control transmitters or
data communication via the network
For more information about residual risks of the components in a drive system, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.


System overview 3
3.1 The SINAMICS range of drives
Field of application
SINAMICS is the comprehensive family of drives from Siemens designed for machine and
plant engineering applications. SINAMICS offers solutions for all drive tasks:
• Simple pump and fan applications in the process industry
• Complex single drives in centrifuges, presses, extruders, elevators, as well as conveyor and
transport systems
• Drive line-ups in textile, plastic film, and paper machines as well as in rolling mill plants.
• Servo drives with a high dynamic performance for machine tools, as well as packaging and
printing machines
Figure 3-1 SINAMICS as part of the Siemens modular automation system

System overview
Variants
Depending on the application, the SINAMICS range offers the ideal variant for any drive task.
• SINAMICS V converters focus on the essential issues - both regarding the hardware as well
as the functionality. This results in a high degree of ruggedness while at the same time
reducing capital investment costs.
• SINAMICS G converters have functions that are perfect in addressing basic and medium
demands relating to the dynamic response.
• SINAMICS S converters have been specially developed for use in demanding single-axis
and multi-axis applications in mechanical and plant engineering and for a broad range of
Motion Control tasks.
Platform concept
All SINAMICS versions are based on a platform concept. Common hardware and software
components, as well as standardized tools for design, configuration and commissioning
tasks, ensure high-level integration across all components. SINAMICS handles a wide variety
of drive tasks without system gaps.
The different SINAMICS versions can be easily combined with each other.
Totally Integrated Automation and communication

SINAMICS is an integral component of Siemens Totally Integrated Automation. The integrated
and seamless SINAMICS system covering engineering, data management, and
communication at the automation level ensures solutions with low associated costs in
conjunction with the SIMATIC, SIMOTION, and SINUMERIK control systems.

System overview
Figure 3-2 SINAMICS in the automation environment
Depending on the application, the appropriate converter can be selected and incorporated in
the automation concept. With this in mind, the converters are clearly subdivided into their
different applications. A wide range of communication options (depending on the drive type)
are available for establishing a communication link to the automation system:
• PROFINET
• PROFIBUS
• EtherNet/IP
• Modbus TCP
• Modbus RTU
• AS-interface
• CANopen
• BacNet MS/TP

System overview
Integrated Drive System (IDS)

The Siemens Integrated Drive Systems (IDS) solution offers perfectly matched drive
components with which you can meet your requirements. The drive components come into
their own as Integrated Drive System, extending from engineering and commissioning
through to operation.
The Drive Technology Configurator is used to configure a seamlessly integrated system:
Simply select the motor and converter and dimension them using the SIZER for Siemens
Drives engineering tool.
The commissioning tools STARTER and SINAMICS Startdrive integrate the motor data at the
same time, therefore simplifying efficient commissioning.
Integrated Drive Systems are integrated in the TIA Portal – which simplifies engineering,
commissioning and diagnostics.
Quality management according to DIN EN ISO 9001

SINAMICS is able to meet the highest requirements in terms of quality. Comprehensive
quality assurance measures in all development and production processes ensure a
consistently high level of quality.
It goes without saying that our quality management system is certified by an independent
authority in accordance with EN ISO 9001.
Universal applications
SINAMICS meets the requirements of relevant international standards and regulations - from
the EN European standards through IEC to UL and cULus.
System properties
The SINAMICS range is characterized by the following system properties:
• Standard and seamless functionality based on a platform concept
• Standardized engineering
• High degree of flexibility and combination capability
• Wide range of power ratings
• Designed for global use
• SINAMICS Safety Integrated
• Higher economic efficiency and effectiveness
• High energy efficiency
• Wide range of coupling options to higher-level control systems
• Totally Integrated Automation

System overview
3.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system
Overview
SINAMICS S120 is the modular drive system with vector and servo control that is ideal for
sophisticated drive tasks in plant and machine construction.
Multi-axis drive solutions with higher-level motion control can be implemented with the
modular SINAMICS S120 system just the same as solutions for single-axis drives.
Covering a power range from 0.12 kW to 5700 kW and various control modules with a
graduated range of functionality, the modular SINAMICS S120 system can be used to simply
and quickly create a precisely tailored drive configuration – for almost any sophisticated drive
application.
For SINAMICS S120, the drive intelligence is combined with closed-loop control functions in
the Control Units.
These units are capable of controlling drives in the vector, servo and U/f modes. They also
perform the speed and torque control functions plus other intelligent drive functions for all
drive axes.
Using the closed-loop control techniques available, both synchronous as well as induction
motors can be operated, and therefore the complete range of low-voltage motors from
Siemens.
Integrated PROFIBUS DP interfaces ensure easy integration into complete automation
solutions. PROFINET is another of the fieldbus interfaces supported by the system.
Benefits
SINAMICS S120 sets itself apart through:
• Can be universally used in high-performance single and multi-axis applications
• Can be freely combined to create customized solutions
• Wide range of power ratings
• Wide range of functions
• SINAMICS Safety Integrated functions
• Supports various cooling types (air/liquid-cooled)
• Supports various infeed concepts
• Can be simply integrated into higher-level automation and IT environments
• User-friendly engineering
• Ease of handling
• Simple installation
• Practical connection system
• Auto-configuration with electronic rating plates

System overview
Control Units
The closed-loop control intelligence for all the drive axes integrated in the multi-axis group is
combined in the Control Units. They also feature drive-related inputs/outputs and interfaces
for communicating with higher-level control systems. Control Units are available with
different functional scopes and with various performance levels.
DRIVE-CLiQ – the digital interface between the components

SINAMICS S120 components, including motors and encoders, are equipped with the high-
performance DRIVE-CLiQ system interface.
Line and Motor Modules for example are connected to the Control Unit – and Terminal
Modules and Sensor Modules to the drive system via DRIVE-CLiQ – simply and efficiently.
Motors that also have this interface can be directly connected to the drive system.
Converter boards (Sensor Modules) for converting standard encoder signals to DRIVE-CLiQ are
available for third-party motors or retrofit applications.
The electronic rating plate

Electronic type plates in every component represent a digital link to the SINAMICS S120 drive
system. They allow all drive components to be automatically identified via the DRIVE-CLiQ
link.
The electronic type plate contains all the relevant technical data about that particular
component. In addition to the technical data, the type plate includes logistical data
(manufacturer ID, article number and ID). Since this data can be called up electronically on
site or remotely, all the components used in a machine can always be individually identified,
which helps simplify servicing.
SINAMICS S120 components

The SINAMICS S120 components are primarily used for multi-axis drive tasks.
The following power components are available:
• Line-side power components, such as fuses, contactors, line reactors and line filters for
switching the power supply and complying with EMC regulations.
• Power Modules, which function as both a power infeed and an inverter.
• Line Modules, which supply power centrally to the DC link.
• DC link components (optional), which stabilize the DC link voltage
• Motor Modules, which act as inverters, receive power from the DC link, and supply the
connected motors.
• Motor-side components, such as sine-wave filters, motor reactors, and dv/dt filters for
reducing the voltage loads on the motor windings.

System overview
To carry out the required functions, SINAMICS S120 is equipped with:

• A Control Unit that handles drive and technological functions across all axes.
• Additional system components that enhance functionality and offer different interfaces
for encoders and process signals.
SINAMICS S120 components were developed for installation in cabinets. They have the
following features and characteristics:
• Easy to handle, simple installation and wiring
• Practical connection system, cable routing in accordance with EMC requirements
• Standardized design, seamless integration.
Boundary conditions for use

The Power Modules, Active Interface Modules, Line Modules and Motor Modules are designed
for connection to a liquid coolant circuit which must be provided by the customer.
The design of this liquid coolant circuit is an important factor in determining the operational
reliability and service life of the equipment and the entire installation.
The main criteria are described in the following chapters.
Advantages of liquid cooling over air cooling

Liquid cooling systems are considerably more efficient at dissipating heat losses than air
cooling systems. As a result, liquid-cooled devices are much more compact than air-cooled
units with the same output rating. Since the heat losses generated by the electronic
components are almost completely dissipated by the liquid coolant, only very small cooling
fans are required. This means that the devices are quiet in operation. Due to their compact
dimensions and almost negligible cooling air requirement, liquid-cooled units are the
preferred solution wherever installation space is restricted and/or the ambient operating
conditions are rough. Control cabinets with liquid cooling are easy to implement as
hermetically sealed units with IP54 degree of protection or above.
In addition to liquid-cooled devices, there are also water-cooled devices; these have been
specifically designed to operate on common circuits for the plant/system, motor and
converter.

System overview
3.3 Technical specifications

Unless specified otherwise, the following technical specifications are valid for all the
following components of the SINAMICS S120 drive system, liquid-cooled.
Table 3- 1 General technical data
Electrical data
Line supply voltage • 3 AC 380 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10%
• 3 AC 500 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10%
Line frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
Output voltage 0 to line connection voltage, depending on the type of infeed.
With an Active Line Module, it is also possible to achieve a higher output voltage.
Output frequency Vector control: 0 ... 550 Hz 1)
Servo control: 0 ... 550 Hz 1)
U/f control: 0 ... 550 Hz 1)
Electronics power supply 24 V DC (20.4V ... 28.8V)
implemented as PELV circuit in accordance with EN 61800-5-1
Ground = Negative polarity grounded via the electronics
Maximum short-circuit current ICC ac- • 1.1 ... 447 kW: 65 kA
cording to IEC, in conjunction with the
specified fuses or circuit breakers • 448 ... 671 kW: 84 kA
• 672 ... 1193 kW: 170 kA
• >1194 kW: 200 kA
Rated short-circuit current SCCR (Short • 1.1 ... 447 kW: 65 kA
Circuit Current Rating) in accordance
with UL508C (up to 600V), in conjunc- • 448 ... 671 kW: 84 kA
tion with the specified fuses or circuit- • 672 ... 1193 kW: 170 kA
breakers
• >1194 kW: 200 kA
Frequency with which the DC link is Max. 1 precharge every 3 minutes
precharged
Overvoltage category Class III according to EN 61800-5-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Emitted interference Category C3 (second environment) according to EN 61800-3
Noise immunity Use in the first and second environment according to EN 61800-3
Mechanical data
Vibratory load
• Transport 2) • EN 60721-3-2, Class 2M2:1997
• Operation • Test values according to EN 60068-2-6 test Fc:
– 10 ... 58 Hz with constant deflection = 0.075 mm
– 58 ... 150 Hz with constant acceleration = 9.81 m/s² (1g)
Shock load
• Transport 2) • EN 60721-3-2, Class 2M2:1997
• Operation • Test values according to EN 60068-2-27 test Ea: 98 m/s² (10g) / 20ms

System overview
Ambient conditions
Degree of protection IP00 according to EN 60529 (IP20, without taking into account the connecting
busbars)
Protection class Class I (with protective conductor system) and class III (PELV) according to
EN 61800-5-1
Touch protection EN 50274 and DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
Cooling method according to • Power Modules, Basic Line Modules, Active Line Modules, Motor Modules: WE
EN 60146-1-1
– W: Liquid cooling
– E: Forced cooling, drive device outside the equipment
• Active Interface Modules, air-cooled: AF
– A: Air cooling
– F: Forced cooling, drive unit inside the device
• Active Interface Modules, liquid-cooled: WE
– W: Liquid cooling
– E: Forced cooling, drive device outside the equipment
• Line reactors, sine-wave filters, motor reactors, dv/dt filters with voltage peak
limiter: AN
– A: Air cooling
– N : Natural cooling (convection)
Cooling circuit
• Max. system pressure with respect • 600 kPa
to atmosphere
• Pressure drop at the heat sink at • 70 kPa
rated volumetric flow
• Recommended pressure range • 80 ... 150 kPa (is applicable for water as coolant)
• Inlet temperature of liquid coolant • Dependent on ambient temperature, no condensation permitted
– 0 ... 45 °C without derating, > 45 ... 50 °C see derating characteristics
– (temperature range between 0 °C and 5 °C - only with antifreeze; anti-
freeze: Antifrogen N, Antifrogen L and Dowcal 100)
Permissible ambient temperature (air) • Dependent on inlet temperature of liquid coolant, no condensation permitted:
in operation
– 0 ... 45 °C without derating
– > 45 ... 50 °C, refer to derating characteristics
Climatic ambient conditions
• Storage 2) • Class 1K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-1:1997, temperature -25 ... +55 °C
max. Air humidity 95 %
• Transport 2) • Class 2K4 according to EN 60721-3-2:1997, temperature -25 ... +70 °C,
max. humidity, 95% at +40 °C
• Operation • better than Class 3K3 according to EN 60721-3-3:2002
Relative humidity: 5 … 95 % (no condensation)
Oil mist, salt mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water, spraying wa-
ter, splashing water and water jets are not permitted

System overview
Environmental class/harmful chemical substances

• Storage 2) • Class 1C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-1:1997
• Transport 2) • Class 2C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-2:1997
• Operation • Class 3C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-3:2002
Environmental class /mechanically active substances
• Storage 2) • Class 1S1 acc. to EN 60721-3-1:1997
• Transport 2) • Class 2S1 acc. to EN 60721-3-2:1997
• Operation • Class 3S1 acc. to EN 60721-3-3:2002
Organic/biological influences
• Storage 2) • Class 1B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-1:1997
• Transport 2) • Class 2B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-2:1997
• Operation • Class 3B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-3:2002
Degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1
The devices may only be operated in environments with degree of pollution 2; the
following guidelines should be applied, especially to avoid condensation:
A ventilated enclosure equipped with filter must be used to provide forced ventila-
tion. This means that ventilation is realized using one or several fans in the enclo-
sure that provide a positive air intake and discharge. The other alternative is to use
heating devices to constantly heat the air in the enclosure or to use heat generat-
ed by continuously energizing the equipment, with interruptions so that the air
does not cool down to the point where condensation can occur.
The Safety Integrated safety function:
The components must be protected against conductive contamination, e.g. by installing them in a cabinet with degree of
protection IP54B according to EN 60529.
Provided that conducted interference can be prevented at the installation site, the degree of protection for the cabinet can
be decreased accordingly.
Installation altitude • > 2000 m above sea level without derating
• > 2000 m above sea level, see derating characteristics
Certificates
Conformity - EMC directive No. 2014/30/EU
- Low-voltage directive No. 2014/35/EU
- RoHS 2 directive No. 2011/65/EU
- Machinery directive No. 2006/42/EC for functional safety
Certificates for marine classes Type certificate for Marine Class DNV GL, valid in conjunction with the installation
regulations specified on the certificate.
Standards EN 61800-5-1, EN 60204-1, EN 61800-3, EN 60146-1-1
Approvals (only up to 3 AC 600 V) cULus (File Nos.: E192450, E214113, E203250 and E253831)
1) Depending on the system configuration, higher output frequencies are possible.
2) In transport packaging
NOTICE
Damage to the device through incorrect storage and transport of liquid-cooled devices
The storage and transport of liquid-cooled devices that have not been completely emptied
can result in damage to the device through freezing.
• Always empty the liquid-cooled devices completely before storage or transport.

System overview
3.4 Derating factors
Note on the design of a UL-approved system
Note
Design of a UL-approved system
For a UL-approved system use 60/75° C copper conductors only.
3.4.1 Derating factors as a function of coolant temperature

Liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 devices are suitable for water or a mixture of water and
antifreeze as coolant, corresponding to Chapter Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors (Page 330).
When water is used as a coolant, the units can supply 100% output current at temperatures
between 5 °C and 45 °C. The maximum output current decreases linearly to 90% at
temperatures between 45 °C and 50 °C.
When water and an antifreeze mixture described above is used as a coolant, the units can
supply 100% output current at temperatures between 0 °C and 45 °C. The maximum output
current decreases linearly to 90% at temperatures between 45 °C and 50 °C.
Figure 3-3 Maximum output current as a function of coolant temperature

System overview
3.4.2 Derating factors as a function of the ambient temperature

The units can supply 100 % output current at an ambient air temperature of between 0 °C
and 45 °C. The maximum output current decreases linearly to 90 % at ambient air
temperatures of between 45 °C and 50 °C.
Figure 3-4 Maximum current as a function of ambient temperature

System overview
3.4.3 Derating factors as a function of installation altitude

When the units are operated at an installation altitude with reduced air pressure, the derating
characteristic shown below applies to the output current or the ambient air temperature.
Figure 3-5 Maximum ambient temperature as a function of installation altitude
At installation altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft), the line voltage must not exceed certain
limits to ensure that surge voltages can be insulated in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1 for
surge voltage category III. If the line voltage is higher than this limit at installation altitudes >
2000 m (6562 ft), measures must be taken to reduce transient category III surge voltages to
category II values, e.g. equipment must be supplied via an isolating transformer.

System overview
Figure 3-6 Voltage correction factor KT as a function of the installation altitude
Note
Rated voltage
Refer to the maximum line voltage under "Connection voltages" in the technical data for
details of the rated voltage.
Note
Input voltage range that can be actually used
The dashed line represents a theoretical characteristic of the correction factor. The devices
have an undervoltage threshold, which leads to shutdown when the voltage drops below it.
Consequently, the input voltage range that is actually usable has a lower limit.

System overview
3.5 Standards
3.5 Standards
Note
Information on the listed standards
The standards listed in the table below are non-binding and do not in any way claim to be
complete. The standards listed do not represent a guaranteed property of the product.
Only the statements made in the Declaration of Conformity shall be deemed binding.
Table 3- 2 Fundamental, application-relevant standards in succession: EN, IEC/ISO, DIN, VDE
Standards* Title
EN ISO 3744 Acoustics - Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using
sound pressure – Engineering methods for an essentially free acoustic field over a reflecting plane
ISO 14118 Safety of machinery; avoiding unexpected starting
DIN EN ISO 14118
EN ISO 9001 Quality management systems - requirements
ISO 9001
DIN EN ISO 9001
ISO 12100 Safety of Machinery
DIN EN ISO 12100 – General Design Guidelines
– Risk Assessment and Risk Minimization
EN ISO 13849-x Safety of Machinery; Safety-Related Parts of Control Systems
ISO 13849-x Part 1: General Basic Design Principles 
DIN EN ISO 13849-x Part 2: Validation
EN ISO 14121-2 Safety of Machinery - Risk Assessment;
ISO 14121-2 Part 2: Practical guidelines and process examples.
DIN EN ISO 14121-2
EN 55011 Industrial, scientific and medical high-frequency devices (ISM devices) -
CISPR 11 radio interference - limit values and measuring techniques
DIN EN 55011
VDE 0875-11
EN 60146-1-1 Semiconductor converters; general requirements and line-commutated converters
IEC 60146-1-1 Part 1-1: Defining the basic requirements
DIN EN 60146-1-1
VDE 0558-11
EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of machines
IEC 60204-1 Part 1: General definitions
DIN EN 60204-1
VDE 0113-1
EN 60228 Conductors for cables and insulated leads
IEC 60228
DIN EN 60228
VDE0295
EN 60269-1 Low-voltage fuses
IEC 60269-1 Part 1: General requirements
DIN EN 60269-1
VDE 0636-1
IEC 60287-1 to -3 Cables – Calculation of the current carrying capacity
Part 1: Current carrying capacity equations (100 % load factor) and calculating the losses
Part 2: Thermal resistance -
Part 3: Main sections for operating conditions

System overview
3.5 Standards
Standards* Title
HD 60364-x-x Erection of power installations with nominal voltages up to 1000 V
IEC 60364-x-x Part 200: Definitions
DIN VDE 0100-x-x Part 410: Protection for safety, protection against electric shock
VDE 0100-x-x Part 420: Protection for safety, protection against thermal effects
Part 430: Protection of cables and conductors for overcurrent
Part 450: Protection for safety, protection against undervoltage
Part 470: Protection for safety; use of protection for safety
Part 5xx: Selecting and erecting electrical equipment
Part 520: Cables, conductors, busbars
Part 540: Grounding, protective conductor, potential bonding conductor
Part 560: Electrical equipment for safety purposes
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
IEC 60529
DIN EN 60529
VDE 0470-1
EN 60721-3-x Classification of environmental conditions
IEC 60721-3-x Part 3-0: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Introduction
DIN EN 60721-3-x Part 3-1: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Long-term storage
Part 3-2: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Transport
Part 3-3: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; stationary use, weather
protected
EN 60947-x-x Low-voltage switchgear
IEC 60947 -x-x
DIN EN 60947-x-x
VDE 0660-x
EN 61000-6-x Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61000-6-x Part 6-1: Generic standard; Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
DIN EN 61000-6-x Part 6-2: Generic standards; Immunity for industrial environments
VDE 0839-6-x Part 6-3: Generic standards; Generic standard emission for residential, commercial and light-
industrial environments
Part 6-4: Generic standards; Generic standard noise emission for industrial environments
EN 61140 Protection against electric shock; Common aspects for installation and equipment
IEC 61140
DIN EN 61140
VDE 0140-1
EN 61439 Low-voltage switchgear assemblies
IEC 61439 Part 1: General definitions
DIN EN 61439
VDE 0660-600
EN 61800-2 Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems
IEC 61800-2 Part 2: General requirements - Rating specifications for low-voltage adjustable frequency a.c. power
DIN EN 61800-2 drive systems
VDE 0160-102
EN 61800-3 Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
IEC 61800-3 Part 3: EMC - Requirements and specific test methods
DIN EN 61800-3
VDE 0160-103
EN 61800-5-x Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems
IEC 61800-5-x Part 5: Safety requirements;
DIN EN 61800-5-x Main section 1: Electrical, thermal and energy requirements
VDE 0160-105-x Main section 2: Functional safety requirements
EN 62061 Safety of machinery
IEC 62061 Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control sys-
DIN EN 62061 tems
VDE 0113-50
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
CSA C22.2 No. 94.1

System overview
3.5 Standards
Standards* Title
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
CSA C22.2 No. 142 Process Control Equipment
UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment
CSA C22.2 No. 14 Industrial Control Equipment
UL61800-5-1 Standard for Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems - Part 5-1: Safety requirements – Elec-
CSA 22.2 No. 274-13 trical, thermal and energy
* The technical requirements in the standards listed are not necessarily identical.

System overview
3.6 Basic structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120
3.6 Basic structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS

S120
3.6.1 Structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 Power

Modules
Figure 3-7 Principle structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 Power Modules

System overview
3.6.2 Structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 and regulated
infeed
Figure 3-8 Basic structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 and regulated infeed

System overview
3.6.3 Structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 and

unregulated infeed
Figure 3-9 Basic structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 and unregulated
infeed

Line-side power components 4
4.1 Line reactors for Power Modules
4.1.1 Description
The line reactors limit low-frequency line harmonics and reduce the load on the
semiconductors in the Power Modules. A line reactor is not required where the effective
supply impedance equals uk > 3 %.
4.1.2 Safety information
WARNING
Not observing fundamental safety instructions and residual risks
Not observing fundamental safety instructions and residual risks listed in Chapter 1 can
result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Comply with the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account residual risks.
CAUTION
Burns resulting from high surface temperature
The line reactors can become very hot. You can get seriously burnt when touching the
surface.
• Mount the line reactors so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach
clearly visible and understandable warning notices at hazardous positions.
• To prevent adjacent components from suffering damage due to these high
temperatures, maintain a clearance of 100 mm on all sides of the line reactors.
NOTICE
Damage to the system caused by the use of inappropriate and not approved line
reactors
Inappropriate and not approved line reactors can damage the Power Modules.
Line harmonics that damage/disturb other loads connected to the same line supply can also
occur.
• Only use line reactors that are listed in this Manual.

Line-side power components
Note
Malfunctions through magnetic fields
Reactors produce magnetic fields that can disturb or damage components and cables.
• Arrange the components and cables at a suitable distance (at least 200 mm) or shield the
magnetic fields appropriately.
Note
Length of connecting cables
The connection lines between line reactor and Power Module must be kept as short as
possible (max. 5 m).
You must use shielded connection cables, whose cable shields are attached at both ends.
Shielding can only be omitted if the following conditions are met:
• The cables do not exceed 1 m in length.
• The cables are laid flush with the rear metal wall of the control cabinet.
• The cables are laid in a way that keeps them physically separate from signal cables.
Do not route any cables near the line reactor. If this cannot be avoided, observe a minimum
clearance of 200 mm.

4.1.3 Dimension drawing
Figure 4-1 Dimension drawing of line reactor for Power Modules

Table 4- 1 Dimensions of line reactors for Power Modules (all data in mm)
6SL3000- 0CE32-3AA0 0CE32-8AA0 0CE33-3AA0 0CE35-1AA0

a2 25 25 25 30
a3 5 5 5 6
a4 12.5 12.5 12.5 15
a5 11 11 11 14
I4 270 270 270 300
I5 88 88 88 100
h2 150 150 150 180
h3 60 60 60 60
h4 248 248 248 269
n1 1) 101 101 101 118
n2 1) 200 200 200 224
n3 200 200 200 212.5
n4 84.5 84.5 84.5 81
d3 M8 M8 M8 M8
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes
4.1.4 Technical data
Table 4- 2 Technical data, line reactors for Power Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
Article number 6SL3000- 0CE32-3AA0 0CE32-8AA0 0CE33-3AA0 0CE35-1AA0

Suitable for Power Module 6SL3315- 1TE32-1AA3 1TE32-6AA3 1TE33-1AA3 1TE35-0AA3
Type rating of the Power kW 110 132 160 250
Module
Rated voltage V 3 AC 380 –10 % (-15 % < 1 min) to 3 AC 480 +10 %
Ithmax A 224 278 331 508
Power loss kW 0.274 0.247 0.267 0.365
Line/load connection M10 connecting M10 connecting M10 connecting M12 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, lugs lugs lugs lugs
1W2
PE connection M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 270 270 270 300
Height mm 248 248 248 269
Depth mm 200 200 200 212.5
Weight kg 24.5 26 27.8 38

4.2 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules
4.2.1 Description
Line reactors limit low-frequency line harmonics and reduce the load on the semiconductors
in the Basic Line Modules.
A line reactor must be used if several Basic Line Modules are operated in parallel.
A line reactor is not required if a single Basic Line Module is used and the effective supply
impedance equals uk > 3 %.
WARNING
CAUTION
Burns resulting from high surface temperature
The line reactors can become very hot. You can get seriously burnt when touching the
surface.
• Mount the line reactors so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach
temperatures, maintain a clearance of 100 mm on all sides of the line reactors.
NOTICE
Damage to the system caused by the use of inappropriate and not approved line
reactors
Inappropriate and not approved line reactors can damage the Line Modules.
Line harmonics that damage/disturb other loads connected to the same line supply can also
occur.
• Only use line reactors that are listed in this Manual.

Note
Malfunctions through magnetic fields
Reactors produce magnetic fields that can disturb or damage components and cables.
• Arrange the components and cables at a suitable distance (at least 200 mm) or shield the
magnetic fields appropriately.
Note
Length of connecting cables
The connection cables between line reactor and Line Module, as well as between line reactor
and line filter, must be kept as short as possible (max. 5 m).
You must use shielded connection cables, whose cable shields are attached at both ends.
Shielding can only be omitted if the following conditions are met:
• The cables do not exceed 1 m in length.
• The cables are laid flush with the rear metal wall of the control cabinet.
• The cables are laid in a way that keeps them physically separate from signal cables.
Do not route any cables near the line reactor. If this cannot be avoided, observe a minimum
clearance of 200 mm.

Figure 4-2 Dimension drawing of line reactors for Basic Line Modules

Table 4- 3 Dimensions of line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 380 V ... 480 V 3 AC (all values in mm)
6SL3000- 0CE36-3AA0 0CE41-0AA0 0CE41-5AA0

a2 30 50 60
a3 6 8 12
a4 15 25 25
a5 14 14 18 x 14
a6 - - 26
a7 - - 17
I4 300 350 460
I5 100 120 152.5
h1 - 397 -
h2 180 252 278
h3 60 120 120
h4 269 321 435
n1 1) 118 138 155
n2 1) 224 264 356
n3 212.5 211.5 235
n4 81 60 60
d3 M8 M8 M12
Table 4- 4 Dimensions of line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 500 V ... 690 V 3 AC (all values in mm)
6SL3000- 0CH33-4AA0 0CH36-0AA0 0CH41-2AA0 0CH41-6AA0

a2 25 30 60 60
a3 5 6 12 12
a4 12.5 15 25 25
a5 11 14 14 18 x 14
a6 - - 26 26
a7 - - 17 17
I4 270 350 460 445
I5 88 120 152.5 152.5
h1 - - - -
h2 150 198 278 278
h3 60 75 120 120
h4 248 321 435 435
n1 1) 101 138 155 170
n2 1) 200 264 356 356
n3 200 232.5 235 250
n4 84.5 81 60.5 60.5
d3 M8 M8 M12 M12

Table 4- 5 Technical data, line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 380 ... 480 V 3 AC
Article number 6SL3000- 0CE36-3AA0 0CE41-0AA0 0CE41-5AA0

Suitable for 6SL3335- 1TE37-4AAx 1TE41-2AAx 1TE41-7AAx
Basic Line Module
Rated power of the Basic Line kW 360 600 830
Module
Ithmax A 628 1060 1458
Power loss kW 0.368 0.498 0.776
Line/load connection M12 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, 1W2 lugs lugs lugs
PE connection M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 300 350 460
Height mm 269 321 435
Depth mm 212.5 211.5 235
Weight kg 41.4 69.6 118
Table 4- 6 Technical data, line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 500 ... 690 V 3 AC
Article number 6SL3000- 0CH33-4AA0 0CH36-0AA0 0CH41-2AA0 0CH41-6AA0

Suitable for 6SL3335- 1TG34-2AAx 1TG37-3AAx 1TG41-3AAx 1TG41-7AAx
Basic Line Module
Rated power of the Basic Line kW 355 630 1100 1370
Module
Ithmax A 342 597 1167 1600
Power loss kW 0.270 0.485 0.783 0.977
Line/load connection M10 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, 1W2 lugs lugs lugs lugs
PE connection M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 270 350 460 445
Height mm 248 321 435 435
Depth mm 200 232.5 235 250
Weight kg 38.9 63.8 147 134

4.3 Active Interface Modules, air-cooled
4.3.1 Description
Air-cooled Active Interface Modules are used in conjunction with liquid-cooled Active Line
Modules in chassis format.
Only the following types are used, otherwise, liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules are
available:
• 3 AC 380 ... 480 V: 300 kW
• 3 AC 500 ... 690 V: 630 kW
The air-cooled Active Interface Modules contain a Clean Power Filter with basic RI
suppression, the pre-charging circuit for the Active Line Module, the line voltage sensing
circuit and monitoring sensors.
Frame size GI is equipped as standard with a bypass contactor which ensures a highly
compact design. The bypass contactor must be provided separately for frame size HI.
The vast majority of line harmonics are suppressed by the Clean Power Filter.
The Active Interface Module contains:

• Clean Power Filter
• Line reactor
• Pre-charging circuit
• Bypass contactor (for frame size GI)
• Line voltage sensing module VSM10
• Fan

Table 4- 7 Active Interface Modules
Frame size GI Frame size HI
Active Interface Module and Active Line Module assignment

The assignment of the Active Interface Modules (liquid cooled and air cooled) to the liquid-
cooled Active Line Modules is shown in the following table.
Table 4- 8 Active Interface Module and Active Line Module assignment
Suitable for Active Line Rated power of the Active Line Active Interface Modules, Active Interface Modules,
Module chassis format, Modules at 400 V or 690 V liquid-cooled air-cooled
liquid cooled kW Article No. Article No.
Line voltage 3 AC 380 … 480 V
6SL3335-7TE35-0AA3 300 – 1) 6SL3300-7TE35-0AA1
6SL3335-7TE36-1AA3 380 6SL3305-7TE38-4AA5
6SL3335-7TE38-4AA3 500 6SL3305-7TE38-4AA5
6SL3335-7TE41-0AA3 630 6SL3305-7TE41-4AA5
6SL3335-7TE41-4AA3 900 6SL3305-7TE41-4AA5
6SL3335-7TG35-8AA3 630 – 1) 6SL3300-7TG35-8AA1
6SL3335-7TG37-4AA3 800 6SL3305-7TG37-4AA5
6SL3335-7TG38-1AA3 900 6SL3305-7TG41-0AA5
6SL3335-7TG41-0AA3 1100 6SL3305-7TG41-0AA5
6SL3335-7TG41-3AA3 1400 6SL3305-7TG41-3AA5
6SL3335-7TG41-6AA3 1700 6SL3305-7TG41-6AA5
1) No liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules are available for these rated powers. Alternatively, air-cooled devices can be
used.

WARNING
WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
cable shields.
• Attach the cable shields at both ends to the grounded housing potential.
WARNING
High leakage currents when the protective conductor in the line feeder cable is
interrupted
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been installed so that it is protected against mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least 2.5
mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected against mechanical damage.
WARNING
• Observe the cooling clearances above, below, and in front of the component, which are
specified in the dimension drawings.

WARNING
Electric shock due to unexpectedly long discharge time
If you operate the Active Interface Module without an Active Line Module, the discharge
time extends to more than 20 minutes after the supply voltage has been disconnected. As a
result, dangerous voltage may unexpectedly be present at the terminals of the Active
Interface Module.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Only operate the Active Interface Module together with an Active Line Module.

4.3.3 Interface description
4.3.3.1 Overview
Figure 4-3 Interface overview in the Active Interface Module, frame size GI

Figure 4-4 Interface overview in the Active Interface Module, frame size HI

4.3.3.2 Connection example
Figure 4-5 Connection example Active Interface Module, frame size GI

Figure 4-6 Connection example Active Interface Module, frame size HI
NOTICE
Damage to the devices as a result of excessively long switching times of the bypass
contactor
When using a bypass contactor with excessively long switching times (maximum 500 ms),
the required overlap phase is not guaranteed, where both contactors are simultaneously
pulled-in. As a consequence, the Active Interface Module can be overloaded and destroyed.
• Only use Siemens bypass contactors; the associated data are provided in the technical
data.
NOTICE
Damage to the device through different phase sequence in the pre-charging and main
circuits
Different phase sequences in the pre-charging and main circuits can overload and destroy
the pre-charging resistors of the Active Interface Module during the brief overlap period,
where both contactors are simultaneously closed.
• Close the power cables in the pre-charging and main circuits with the same phase
sequence.

4.3.3.3 Motor circuit breaker -Q101

Motor circuit breaker -Q101 is used to protect the fan.
The fan is adequately protected as result of the factory setting.
In the factory setting, the motor circuit breaker is set corresponding to the following table.
Table 4- 9 Factory setting of the motor circuit breaker
Active Interface Module Motor circuit breaker type Setting value

Frame size GI 3RV2011-0JA25 (0.7 ... 1 A) 1A
Frame size HI 3RV2011-0GA25 (4.5 ... 6.3 A) 5.5 A
4.3.3.4 Line/load connection
Table 4- 10 Connections for the Active Interface Module
Terminals Designations
X1: L1, L2, L3 Voltage:
X2: U2, V2, W2
• 3 AC 380 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10 %
• 3 AC 500 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10 %
Frequency: 47 ... 63 Hz
Connecting thread:
• Frame size GI: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame size HI: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
K4: 2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3 Connection for pre-charging circuit directly on pre-charging contactor:
(for frame sizes HI)
• Frame size HI: 2 x 16 mm² max. (3RT1034)
PE connection Connecting thread:
• Frame size GI: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame size HI: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "cable lugs" in the appendix.

4.3.3.5 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
Table 4- 11 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
Connector PIN Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
A + (24 V) 24 V power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces (50 pcs.) Article number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0
4.3.3.6 X530 neutral point grounding
Table 4- 12 Neutral point grounding X530
Connector Terminal Designation Technical specifications

1 Neutral point of the Jumper inserted: Grounded measurement
voltage sensing Jumper not inserted: isolated measurement
2 Ground potential
The Voltage Sensing Module is supplied with inserted jumper. When delivered, the neutral
point is connected to the protective conductor via the connector jumper. Current can flow to
PE. This connection is removed by removing the connector jumper. The measurement is then
electrically isolated.
Figure 4-7 Internal circuit of the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
When the Active Interface Module is operated on an ungrounded line system (IT system), the
connection clip must be removed, see "Electrical connection (Page 72)".

Note
Replacing a VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
When replacing a Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 by one with a different article number,
then inform yourself about the applicable boundary conditions.
4.3.3.7 X609 terminal strip
Table 4- 13 Terminal strip X609
Connector Terminal Designation Technical data

1 P24 External 24 V DC supply
2 P24 Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.5 V)
Current consumption: Max. 0.25 A
3 M
4 M
5 L Voltage: 230 VAC (195.5 ... 264.5 V)
6 L Current consumption: Max. 10 A
7 N Fan operating currents, see "Technical data"
8 N
9 Pre-charging contactor–A1 Voltage: 230 V AC To Active Line Module, X9:5
10 Pre-charging contactor–A2 (195.5 ... 264.5 V) To Active Line Module, X9:6
Current consumption: Max. 4 A
11 Bypass contactor–A1 Voltage: 230 V AC To Active Line Module, X9:3
12 Bypass contactor–A2 (195.5 ... 264.5 V) To Active Line Module, X9:4
Current consumption: Max. 6 A
13 Contactor feedback signal 1* Voltage: 230 VAC (195.5 ... 264.5 V)
14 Contactor feedback signal 2*  Max. permissible current: 6 A
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2
* Series connection NO contact of pre-charging contactor and bypass contactor (only for frame size GI)
NOTICE
Device failure due to overtemperature caused by incorrect wiring of Active Interface
Modules with frame size HI
In operation, Active Interface Modules, frame sizes HI require a signal on terminals X609:11
and X609:12 to control the fans. If this signal is not present during operation, the fans do
not rotate and the module is shut down on overtemperature.
• Connect the signals on terminals X609:11 and X609:12 to the Active Interface Modules
of frame sizes HI to control the fans.

Module
Table 4- 14 Description of the LED on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) in the Active Interface Module
LED Color Status Description

RDY --- Off The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside the permissible
tolerance range.
Green Continuous light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communi-
cation is taking place.
Orange Continuous light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red Continuous light This component has at least one fault.
Remark:
The LED is activated irrespective of whether the corresponding messag-
es have been reconfigured.
Green/red Flashing 0.5 Hz Firmware is being downloaded.
2 Hz flashing light Firmware download is complete. Waiting for POWER ON.
Green / orange 2 Hz flashing light Detection of the components via LED is activated (p0144).
or Remark:
red / orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is
activated via p0144 = 1.

Dimension drawing, frame size GI

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.
Figure 4-8 Dimension drawing for Active Interface Module, frame size GI Side view, front view

Dimension drawing, frame size HI

Figure 4-9 Dimension drawing for Active Interface Module, frame size HI Side view, rear view

4.3.5 Electrical connection

The Active Interface Module is electrically connected in accordance with the connection
examples shown in section "Interface description".
Operating an Active Interface Module on a non-grounded line supply (IT system)

When the device is operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system), the integrated basic
interference suppression modules must be deactivated by removing a connection clip.
Note
Warning label on the connection clip
A yellow warning label is attached to each connection clip so that it is easier to find.
• The warning label must removed from the connection clip (by pulling it off) if the
connection clip is to remain in the unit (operation on a grounded line supply).
• The warning label must be removed together with the connection clip if the unit is
operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system).
Figure 4-10 Warning label on the connection clip

Figure 4-11 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Active
Interface Module for frame size GI

Figure 4-12 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Active
Interface Module for frame size HI

NOTICE
Damage to the device through not removing the connection clip with a non-grounded
line supply
Failure to remove the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module on a
non-grounded line supply (IT system) can cause significant damage to the device.
• With a non-grounded line supply (IT system), remove the connection clip to the basic
interference suppression module.
Removing the connector jumper in the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module

When operating the Active Interface Module on a non-grounded line supply (IT system), at
the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10), remove the plug-in jumper in terminal X530 at the
lower side of the component.
Use two screwdrivers or another suitable tool to relieve the holding springs in the terminal
and then withdraw the plug-in jumper.
Terminal X530 with connector jumper Relieve the springs and withdraw the connector
jumper

Table 4- 15 Technical data for Active Interface Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
Article number 6SL3300– 7TE35–0AA1

Suitable for Active Line Module 6SL3335- 7TE35-0AA3
Rated power of kW 300
Active Line Module
Rated input current of the Active Line A 490
Module
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronics power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Fan supply voltage VAC 230 (195.5 ... 264.5)
DC link capacitance
of the drive line-up, max. µF 76800
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 0.17
- Fan supply, 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz, max. A 0.9 / 1.2
- Max. pre-charging current (max. 3 s) A 57
Bypass contactor included
Power consumption bypass contactor
(230 VAC)
- Making current A 2.5
- Holding current A 1.2
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40
- With derating °C 55
Power loss, max. 1)
- at 50 Hz 400 V kW 3.9
- at 60 Hz 460 V kW 3.9
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.47
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connection for screw
L1, L2, L3 / U2, V2, W2 M10
PE connection M10 screw
Max. connection cross-section
- Line connection (L1, L2, L3) mm² 2 x 185
- Load connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 2 x 185
- PE connection mm² 2 x 185
Degree of protection IP20
Dimensions
- Width mm 325
- Height mm 1533
- Depth mm 542
Frame size GI
Weight kg 190
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

Article number 6SL3300– 7TG35–8AA1

Suitable for Active Line Module 6SL3335- 7TG35-8AA3
Rated power of kW 630
Active Line Module
Rated input current of the Active Line A 575
Module
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 500 -10 % (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
DC link capacitance
of the drive line-up, max. µF 59200
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 0.17
- Fan supply, 230 V AC, max. A 4.6
- Max. pre-charging current (max. 3 s) A 141
Bypass contactor 1) A 3RT1476-
6AP36
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40
- With derating °C 55
Power loss, max. 2)
- at 50 Hz 690 V kW 6.8
- at 60 Hz 575 V kW 6.8
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.40
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connection for screw
L1, L2, L3 / U2, V2, W2 M12
PE connection M12 screw
- Line connection (L1, L2, L3) mm² 4 x 240
- Load connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 4 x 240
- PE connection mm² 2 x 240
Dimensions
- Width mm 305
- Height mm 1750
- Depth mm 544
Frame size HI
Weight kg 390
1) Bypass contactor is not included, must be provided separately.
2) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% utilization level. The value in normal operation is lower.
3) The circuit breaker is controlled by the sequence control of the Active Line Module, and it is not permissible that it is
manually closed. Therefore, we recommend that the circuit breaker is equipped with a locking set
3WL9111-0BA21-0AA0.

4.3.7 Derating factors as a function of installation altitude and ambient

temperature
Chassis units and the associated system components are rated for an ambient temperature of
40 °C and installation altitudes up to 2000 m above sea level.
At ambient temperatures > 40 °C, the output current must be reduced. Ambient
temperatures above 55 °C are not permissible.
At installation altitudes > 2000 m above sea level, it must be taken into account that the air
pressure, and therefore air density, decreases as the height increases. This reduces both the
cooling effect as well as the insulating strength of the air.
As a result of the lower cooling effect, on one hand, the ambient temperature must be
reduced, and on the other hand, the power loss in the chassis unit must also be reduced by
decreasing the output current; whereby ambient temperatures less than 40 °C can be
factored in as countermeasure for compensation.
The following table shows the permissible output currents as a function of installation
altitude and ambient temperature (the permissible compensation between installation
altitude and ambient temperatures of < 40 °C – inlet air temperature at the air inlet of the
chassis unit – is taken into account in the specified values).
The values apply under the precondition that a cooling air flow though the units as stated in
the technical data is ensured.
As an additional measure at installation altitudes of 2000 m up to 4000 m, the use of an
isolating transformer is required to reduce transient overvoltages in accordance with
EN 61800-5-1.
Table 4- 17 Current derating for chassis units as a function of ambient temperature (air intake temperature at the air inlet
of the chassis unit) and installation altitude
Installation altitude Current derating factor (in % of rated current)

above sea level in m at an ambient temperature (air intake temperature) of
20 °C 25 °C 30 °C 35 °C 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C
0 ... 2000 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 93.3% 86.7% 80.0%
... 2500 100% 100% 100% 100% 96.3%
... 3000 100% 100% 100% 98.7%
... 3500 100% 100% 100%
... 4000 100% 100% 96.3%

4.3.8 Parameterization
The thresholds for the temperature monitoring must be parameterized correctly for safe
operation. This is realized automatically when commissioning the system using the STARTER
or Startdrive commissioning tool. When doing this, by selecting the Active Line Module, the
appropriate Active Interface Module is automatically assigned (p0220 "Infeed line filter
type").
The values for the temperature monitoring for air-cooled Active Interface Modules are set as
follows:
• Alarm threshold p3667: 150 °C
• Trip threshold p3668: 180 °C
Note
Note regarding STARTER V4.4.1
The product is supported from STARTER version V4.4.1.

4.4 Active Interface Modules, liquid-cooled
4.4.1 Description
Liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules are used in conjunction with liquid-cooled Active Line
Modules in chassis format. The liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules contain a Clean Power
Filter with basic RI suppression, the pre-charging circuit for the Active Line Module, the line
voltage sensing circuit and monitoring sensors.
The bypass contactor must be provided separately for frame size JIL.
The vast majority of line harmonics are suppressed by the Clean Power Filter.
The liquid-cooled Active Interface Module contains:

• Clean Power Filter
• Filter reactor
• Pre-charging circuit
• Line voltage sensing module VSM10
The liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules comprise the following components:
• Filter reactor
• Filter module
• Associated connection elements (pressure hose, cable, hose connections)
Components
The article numbers of the individual components (filter reactor and filter module) are listed
in the following table:
Table 4- 18 Liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules, article numbers of the individual components
Active Interface Module Filter reactor Filter module

Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
6SL3305-7TE38-4AA5 6SL3005-0DE38-4AA0 6SL3005-0FE38-4AA5
6SL3305-7TE41-4AA5 6SL3005-0DE41-4AA0 6SL3005-0FE41-4AA5
6SL3305-7TG37-4AA5 6SL3005-0DG37-4AA0 6SL3005-0FG37-4AA5

WARNING
WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
cable shields.
• Attach the cable shields at both ends to the grounded housing potential.
WARNING
interrupted
or serious injury.
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected against mechanical damage. 1)
mm² Cu.
WARNING
• Observe the ventilation clearances above, below, and in front of the component, which
are specified in the dimension drawings.

WARNING
Electric shock due to unexpectedly long discharge time
If you operate the Active Interface Module without an Active Line Module, the discharge
time extends to more than 20 minutes after the supply voltage has been disconnected. As a
result, dangerous voltage may unexpectedly be present at the terminals of the Active
Interface Module.
• Only operate the Active Interface Module together with an Active Line Module.
CAUTION
Burns resulting from high surface temperature of the filter reactor
The filter reactors can become very hot. You can get seriously burnt when touching the
surface.
• Mount the filter reactors so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach
temperatures, maintain a ventilation clearance of at least 140 mm above the filter
reactors.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by mechanically stressed busbars and coolant connections
Mechanically stressed busbars and coolant connections can damage the device.
• Do not use the busbars and liquid coolant connections protruding from the device as
handles or as support surfaces during transport.
NOTICE
Damage to the device through operation of the Active Interface Module without Active
Line Module
If the Active Interface Module is operated without the associated Active Line Module, it can
be damaged.
• Only operate the Active Interface Module in conjunction with the associated Active Line
Module.
NOTICE
Damage to the Active Interface Modules when operated without coolant
If the Active Interface Module is operated without liquid coolant, even when operated under
no-load conditions, the Active Interface Module can be damaged.
• Only operate the Active Interface Module with a filled and functioning cooling circuit.

Note
Cable lengths
The connecting cables between the filter reactor and the filter module must be kept as short
as possible (max. 2 m).

4.4.3.1 Overview
Figure 4-13 Interface overview filter reactor, size JIL, valid for article numbers 6SL3005-0DE38-4AA0,
6SL3005-0DG37-4AA0 and 6SL3005-0DG41-3AA0
Figure 4-14 Interface overview filter reactor, frame size JIL, valid for article numbers
6SL3005-0DE41-4AA0 and 6SL3005-0DG41-6AA0

Figure 4-15 Interface overview filter reactor, frame size JIL, valid for article numbers 6SL3005-0FE38-4AA5,
6SL3005-0FG37-4AA5, 6SL3005-0FG41-0AA5 and 6SL3005-0FG41-3AA5
Figure 4-16 Interface overview filter reactor, frame size JIL, valid for article numbers 6SL3005-0FE41-4AA5 and
6SL3005-0FG41-6AA5

Figure 4-17 Connection example of liquid-cooled Active Interface Module, frame size JIL, valid for article numbers
6SL3305-7TE38-4AA5, 6SL3305-7TG37-4AA5, 6SL3305-7TG41-0AA5 and 6SL3305-7TG41-3AA5

Figure 4-18 Connection example of liquid-cooled Active Interface Module, frame size JIL, valid for article numbers
6SL3305-7TE41-4AA5 and 6SL3305-7TG41-6AA5

NOTICE
Damage to the devices as a result of excessively long switching times of the bypass
contactor
When using a bypass contactor with excessively long switching times (maximum 500 ms),
the required overlap phase is not guaranteed, where both contactors are simultaneously
pulled-in. As a consequence, the Active Interface Module can be overloaded and destroyed.
• Only use Siemens bypass contactors; the associated data are provided in the technical
data.
NOTICE
Damage to the device through different phase sequence in the pre-charging and main
circuits
Different phase sequences in the pre-charging and main circuits can overload and destroy
the pre-charging resistors of the Active Interface Module during the brief overlap period,
where both contactors are simultaneously closed.
• Close the power cables in the pre-charging and main circuits with the same phase
sequence.
Table 4- 19 Filter reactor connections
Line connection: U1, V1, W1 Voltage:
Load connection: U2, V2, W2
• 3 AC 380 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10%
• 3 AC 500 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10%
Connection lug: M12/50 Nm for busbar connection
PE connection Connecting thread: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "Cable lugs" in the Appendix.
Note
Busbar connection for line/load connections with 4 screw holes from below
For filter reactors with line/load connections with 4 screw holes (connection type 1, see
Chapter "Dimension drawing (Page 92)") the busbars must be installed from below to the
connection lugs. It is not possible to connect the busbars from the top as a result of the
position of the cooling lines for the filter reactor.
Table 4- 20 Filter module connections
K4: 2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3 Connection for pre-charging circuit directly on pre-charging contactor: 2 x 35mm² max. (3RT1044)
PE connection Connection lug: M8 / 13 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "Cable lugs" in the Appendix.

4.4.3.4 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
Table 4- 21 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

4.4.3.5 X530 neutral point grounding
Table 4- 22 Neutral point grounding X530
Connector Terminal Designation Technical specifications

1 Neutral point of the Jumper inserted: Grounded measurement
voltage sensing Jumper not inserted: isolated measurement
2 Ground potential
The Voltage Sensing Module is supplied with inserted jumper. When delivered, the neutral
point is connected to the protective conductor via the connector jumper. Current can flow to
PE. This connection is removed by removing the connector jumper. The measurement is then
electrically isolated.
Figure 4-19 Internal circuit of the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
When the Active Interface Module is operated on an ungrounded line system (IT system), the
connection clip must be removed, see "Electrical connection (Page 107)".

Note
Replacing a VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
When replacing a Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 by one with a different article number,
then inform yourself about the applicable boundary conditions.
Connector Terminal Designation Technical data

PE PE PE connection
1 P24 External 24 V DC supply
2 P24 Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.5 V)
Current consumption: max. 0.25 A
3 M
4 M
5 L Voltage: 230 V AC (195.5 ... 264.5 V)
6 L Current consumption: max. 4 A
7 N
8 N
9 Pre-charging contactor–A1 Voltage: 230 V AC To Active Line Module, X9:5
10 Pre-charging contactor–A2 (195.5 ... 264.5 V) To Active Line Module, X9:6
Current consumption: max. 4 A
11 Bypass contactor–A1 Voltage: 230 V AC To Active Line Module, X9:3
12 Bypass contactor–A2 (195.5 ... 264.5 V) To Active Line Module, X9:4
Current consumption: max. 6 A
13 Contactor feedback signal 1 Voltage: 230 V AC (195.5 ... 264.5 V)
14 Contactor feedback signal 2  Max. permissible current: 6 A
PE PE PE connection
4.4.3.7 X1 temperature sensor connection at the filter reactor
Table 4- 24 Terminal strip X1 at filter reactor
Terminal Designations
1 PT1000 temperature sensor connection
2

Note
When operating the Active Interface Module, it is not necessary to evaluate the temperature
sensor at the filter reactor.
In the filter module cooling circuit, a water-cooled resistor has an integrated PT1000
temperature sensor, which is internally evaluated by the VSM10.
The following temperature thresholds apply for additional filter reactor temperature
monitoring:
• Alarm: 140 °C
• Fault: 150 °C
Module
Table 4- 25 Description of the LED on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) in the Active Interface Module
LED Color Status Description

RDY --- Off The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside the permissible
tolerance range.
Green Continuous light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communi-
cation is taking place.
Orange Continuous light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red Continuous light This component has at least one fault.
Remark:
The LED is activated irrespective of whether the corresponding messag-
es have been reconfigured.
Green/red Flashing 0.5 Hz Firmware is being downloaded.
2 Hz flashing light Firmware download is complete. Waiting for POWER ON.
Green / orange 2 Hz flashing light Detection of the components via LED is activated (p0144).
or Remark:
red / orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is
activated via p0144 = 1.

Dimension drawing, filter reactor
Figure 4-20 Dimension drawing, filter reactor frame size JIL
Table 4- 26 Dimensions of the filter reactors (all values in mm)
6SL3005- 0DE38-4AA0 0DE41-4AA0 0DG37-4AA0 0DG41-3AA0 0DG41-6AA0

W 349 382 358 440 440
H 700 698 675 705 705
D <575 <575 <575 <575 <575
Connection type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 2 Type 2

Dimension drawing, filter module
Figure 4-21 Dimension drawing, filter module, frame size JIL

4.4.5 Installation
Transport fixtures for the filter reactor

There are lifting eyes on the top of the filter reactor to facilitate transporting it.
NOTICE
Damage to the device due to improper transport
Improper transport can mechanically stress the housing of the filter reactor that can damage
it.
• Use a lifting harness with vertical ropes or chains when transporting the filter reactor.
• Do not use the busbars of the filter reactor as handles or for fastening a lifting harness.
Screw coupling points to mechanically support the filter module

The filter module is mounted at the rear of the control cabinet. The side panels of the filter
module must be mechanically supported against vibration. Screw coupling points are
provided on the side panels for this purpose.
Removing the transport plate

A transport plate is mounted on the underside of the filter module for transport. Remove this
transport plate before installation in a control cabinet.
Figure 4-22 Transport plate on the underside of the filter module

4.4.6 Notes on installation in a control cabinet

A typical control cabinet design is shown in the following that shows the mounting of the
main components (filter reactor and filter module) with the supplied pressure hoses and
connecting cables.
Connection kit for Active Interface Modules

The connection kit for liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules is shown in the following.
Figure 4-23 Connection kit for Active Interface Modules

Control cabinet example, valid for article numbers 6SL3305-7TE38-4AA5, 6SL3305-7TG37-4AA5,

6SL3305-7TG41-0AA5 and 6SL3305-7TG41-3AA5

① Connections (U1, V1, W1) at the filter module to establish the connection to the line side of the
filter reactor (U1, V1, W1)
② Partition plate (not included in the scope of supply) to shield the power loss of the filter reactor
from the filter module
③ Hose between the return and filter reactor (P1)
④ Hose between the intake and filter module (P7)
⑤ PE connection between the PE rail and filter module
⑥ PE connection between the PE rail and filter module
⑦ Support plate (not included in the scope of supply) for the filter reactor
⑧ PE rail (not included in the scope of supply)
⑨ Intake (not included in the scope of supply)
⑩ Return (not included in the scope of supply)
⑪ Holding plate for lateral insulating mats (not included in the scope of supply)
⑫ Lateral insulating mat (not included in the scope of supply)
⑬ Insulating mat between the filter reactor and filter module (not included in the scope of supply)
⑭ Mounting space for DC busbars, 200 mm high
Figure 4-24 Typical control cabinet design, Rittal TS8, cabinet width 600 mm

① Connections (U1, V1, W1) at the filter module to establish the connection to the line side of the filter reactor (U1, V1,
W1)
② Partition plate (not included in the scope of supply) to shield the power loss of the filter reactor from the filter module
Figure 4-25 Typical control cabinet design, Rittal TS8, cabinet width 600 mm, exploded view

There must be a minimum clearance of 970 mm between the lower edge of the transport
plate (⑦) and the lower edge of the filter module.
The dimensions of the typical cabinet (Rittal TS8) are (width x height x depth) 600 mm x
2200 mm x 600 mm
The insulating mat between the filter reactor and the filter module is made of "AF/Armaflex
AF-19MM/EA" and has the following properties:
• Thickness: 19 mm
• Thermal conductivity: ≤ 0.033 W/(m x K)
• Upper application temperature: 110 °C
• UL certification
• Self adhesive
The entries for the cables and hoses should be made so that there is no heat loss (e.g. cross-
shaped cuts).
The lateral insulating mats are made of "HT/Armaflex HT-10-99/E" and have the following
properties:
• Not self-adhesive (are held by the lugs of the lateral holding plate)
Additional insulating mats made of the same material should be attached to the front and
rear of the control cabinet.
Note
Use of thermally insulating mats
In the electrical cabinet design shown as example, thermally insulating mats must be used in
order to maintain the following boundary conditions:
• The insulating mats are used so that the power loss dissipated to the coolant is
maintained, and the power loss dissipated to the environment is not exceeded.
• The lateral thermally insulating mats (⑫) prevent the adjacent cabinets and/or doors from
becoming too hot.
• The thermally insulating mat between the filter reactor and filter module (⑬) prevents the
filter module from overheating as a result of the power loss in the filter reactor.

WARNING
Fire and device damage as a result of ground fault/short-circuit
Inadequate installation of the cables between the filter reactor and the filter module can
result in a ground fault/short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated
smoke and fire.
• Apply the local installation regulations to avoid this fault.
• Protect the cables against mechanical damage.
• Also implement one of the following measures:
– Use cables with double insulation.
– Maintain adequate clearance, e.g. by using spacers.
– Lay the cables in separate cable ducts or conduits.

Control cabinet example, valid for article number 6SL3305-7TE41-4AA5 and

6SL3305-7TG41-6AA5

① Connections (U1, V1, W1) at the filter module to establish the connection to the line side of the
filter reactor (U1, V1, W1)
② Partition plate (not included in the scope of supply) to stabilize the thermally insulating mat be-
tween the filter reactor and the filter module (⑬)
⑭ Mounting space for DC busbars, 200 mm high
Figure 4-26 Typical control cabinet design, Rittal TS8, cabinet width 600 mm

① Connections (U1, V1, W1) at the filter module to establish the connection to the line side of the filter reactor (U1, V1,
W1)
② Partition plate (not included in the scope of supply) to stabilize the thermally insulating mat between the filter reactor
and the filter module (⑬)
Figure 4-27 Typical control cabinet design, Rittal TS8, cabinet width 600 mm, exploded view

There must be a minimum clearance of 970 mm between the lower edge of the transport
plate (⑦) and the lower edge of the filter module.
The dimensions of the typical cabinet (Rittal TS8) are (width x height x depth) 600 mm x
2200 mm x 600 mm
The insulating mat between the filter reactor and the filter module is made of "AF/Armaflex
AF-19MM/EA" and has the following properties:
• Self adhesive
The entries for the cables and hoses should be made so that there is no heat loss (e.g. cross-
shaped cuts).
The lateral insulating mats are made of "HT/Armaflex HT-10-99/E" and have the following
properties:
• Not self-adhesive (are held by the lugs of the lateral holding plate)
Additional insulating mats made of the same material should be attached to the front and
rear of the control cabinet.
Note
Use of thermally insulating mats
In the electrical cabinet design shown as example, thermally insulating mats must be used in
order to maintain the following boundary conditions:
• The insulating mats are used so that the power loss dissipated to the coolant is
maintained, and the power loss dissipated to the environment is not exceeded.
• The lateral thermally insulating mats (⑫) prevent the adjacent cabinets and/or doors from
becoming too hot.
• The thermally insulating mat between the filter reactor and filter module (⑬) prevents the
filter module from overheating as a result of the power loss in the filter reactor.

WARNING
Inadequate installation of the cables between the filter reactor and the filter module can
result in a ground fault/short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated
smoke and fire.
• Apply the local installation regulations to avoid this fault.
• Protect the cables against mechanical damage.
• Also implement one of the following measures:
– Lay the cables in separate cable ducts or conduits.
4.4.7 Cooling circuit connections
Scope of supply
The unassembled connecting hose is supplied with the loose parts so that it can be adapted
to the local conditions.
Six hose connections (straight and angled) with the associated gaskets are also supplied.
Enough connection hose is supplied so that the filter reactor and the filter module can be
installed as shown in Section "Notes on installation in a control cabinet (Page 95)".
Connection diagram
The cooling circuit connections can be taken from the connection example.
Establishing the connections

If the components and the cooling water feed are arranged as described above, then the
supplied unassembled pressure hose can be used.
If a different arrangement is used, connecting hoses of the same quality must be used:
• Hose diameter 3/4"
• Pressure rating, minimum 12 bar
• Maximum hose length 2 m
• Non-conductive, resistance 1 MΩ/m

Article numbers 6SL3305-7TE41-4AA5 and 6SL3305-7TG41-6AA5:

The hose connections must be fastened with the gaskets with a tightening torque of 30 Nm:
• The straight hose connections are intended for P1, P5 and P6.
• The angled hose connections are intended for P3, P4 and P7.
Article numbers 6SL3305-7TE38-4AA5, 6SL3305-7TG37-4AA5, 6SL3305-7TG41-0AA5 and

6SL3305-7TG41-3AA5:
The hose connections must be fastened with the gaskets with a tightening torque of 30 Nm:
• The straight hose connection is intended for P1.
• The angled hose connections are intended for P4, P6 and P7.
The hoses must be fastened to the hose connections with two hose clamps each with a
tightening torque of 3 Nm.
After assembly, the tightness must be tested with a pressure test.
WARNING
Electric shock due to insufficient insulating clearance
Incorrect routing of the coolant lines can result in insufficient insulating clearance to live
parts and can cause death or serious injury.
• Route the coolant pipes very carefully.
• Make sure that the coolant lines do not come into contact with live parts and that an
insulation clearance (clearances and creepage distances) of >13 mm is always
maintained.
• Mechanically secure the coolant lines and check that they have no leaks.
Note
Checking the hose lines
The inspection intervals depend on the prevailing ambient conditions.
The following points should be noted for the coolant hoses:
• Damage through abrasion points
• Embrittlement (e.g. forming of cracks)
• Leaks
• The hose slipping out of the coupling
• Deformations that do not comply with the natural shape of the hose (e.g. separation of
layers and blistering)
• Exceeding the storage and use times
In accordance with the accepted rules and standards, we recommend a testing cycle of
five years with the appropriate test pressure (twice the operating pressure).

Note
Replacement seal
The seals for the screwed connections can be used only once when the cooling circuit is first
assembled. The seals must be replaced if the circuit is disassembled and assembled again.
The replacement seal is commercially available as flat Viton polymer seal with hardness 75
(+/-5) Shore A (Viton is the commercial name for elastomers with the abbreviations FPM and
FKM). The dimensions are as follows: Outer diameter 26 mm, inner diameter 15 mm,
thickness 1.5 mm.
Scope of delivery
Six cables to electrically connect the filter reactor with the filter module and two cables to
ground the filter module are included in the scope delivery:
• 6 cables (cross-section 95 mm², reinforced insulation), 820 mm long to connect the filter
module (U1, V1, W1) with the line side of the filter reactor (U1, V1, W1).
The filter module has cable lug connections with diameters for M8 screws
• 2 cables, yellow/green (cross-sections 120 mm²), 1100 mm long for the ground
connection (PE) of the filter module
Sufficient cable is supplied so that the filter reactor and the filter module can be installed as
shown in Section "Notes on installation in a control cabinet (Page 95)".
The ground connection at the filter module must be realized at both PE connections.

Establishing the connections

If the components are arranged as described above, then the cables supplied can be used.
If a different arrangement is used, cables of the same quality must still be used.
WARNING
Fire and device damage as a result of short-circuit / ground fault
The cables to the filter module must be routed so that a ground fault or short-circuit can be
ruled out. A ground fault can result in fire with associated smoke.
• Protect the cables from mechanical damage
• Comply with local installation regulations that enable this fault to be ruled out.
In addition, apply one of the following measures:
• Use cables with double insulation.
• Maintain adequate clearance, e.g. using spacers.
• Route the cables in separate cable ducts or pipes.
Operating an Active Interface Module on a non-grounded line supply (IT system)

When the device is operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system), the integrated basic
interference suppression modules must be deactivated by removing a connection clip.
Note
Warning label on the connection clip
A yellow warning label is attached to each connection clip so that it is easier to find.
• The warning label must removed from the connection clip (by pulling it off) if the
connection clip is to remain in the unit (operation on a grounded line supply).
• The warning label must be removed together with the connection clip if the unit is
operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system).
Figure 4-28 Warning label on the connection clip

Figure 4-29 Connection clip at the filter module
NOTICE
line supply

Removing the connector jumper in the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module

When operating the Active Interface Module on a non-grounded line supply (IT system), at
the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10), remove the plug-in jumper in terminal X530 at the
lower side of the component.
Use two screwdrivers or another suitable tool to relieve the holding springs in the terminal
and then withdraw the plug-in jumper.
Terminal X530 with connector jumper Relieve the springs and withdraw the connector
jumper

Article number 6SL3305– 7TE38–4AA5 7TE38–4AA5 7TE41–4AA5 7TE41–4AA5

Suitable for Active Line Module 6SL3335- 7TE36-1AA3 7TE38-4AA3 7TE41-0AA3 7TE41-4AA3
Rated power of kW 380 500 630 900
Active Line Module
Rated input current of the Active Line A 605 840 985 1405
Module
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 –10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10 %
DC link capacitance
of the drive line-up, max. µF 134400 134400 230400 230400
Electronics current consumption A 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17
(24 V DC)
Bypass contactor 1) 3RT1476- 3WL1110- 3WL1112- 3WL1116-
6AP36 2BB34-4AN2-Z 2BB34-4AN2-Z 2BB34-4AN2-Z
Z=C22 3) Z=C22 3) Z=C22 3)
Rated flow rate l/min 10 10 16 16
for water with 70 kPa pressure drop
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 71 71 / 71 71 / 71 71 / 71
Frame size JIL JIL JIL JIL
Filter reactor
Article number 6SL3005- 0DE38-4AA0 0DE38-4AA0 0DE41-4AA0 0DE41-4AA0
Cooling method Liquid cooling (aluminum heat sink)
Power loss, max. 2)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 3.5 3.5 8.6 8.6
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 3.5 3.5 8.6 8.6
- Dissipated to the ambient air kW 1.2 1.2 0.9 0.9
Liquid volumes
- Integrated reactor cooler dm³ 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
- Hoses supplied dm³/m 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285
Coolant connections Pipe thread ISO 228 - G 3/4 B
Return and connection to filter module (external thread 3/4", flat-sealing)
Tightening torque for coolant Nm 6 6 6 6
connections
Line/load connection Flat connection for M12 screw
U1, V1, W1 / U2, V2, W2
PE connection M10 bolts M10 bolts M10 bolts M10 bolts
- line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 1500 1500 1500 1500
- load connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 1500 1500 1500 1500
- to the filter Module (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 95
- PE connection mm² 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240


Dimensions
- Width mm 349 349 382 382
- Height mm 700 700 698 698
- Depth mm <575 <575 <575 <575
Weight kg 230 230 299 299
Filter module
Article number 6SL3005- 0FE38-4AA5 0FE38-4AA5 0FE41-4AA5 0FE41-4AA5
Power loss, max. 2)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 2.7 2.7 3.6 3.6
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 2.7 2.7 3.6 3.6
Liquid volumes of the filter module dm³ 1 1 1 1
Intake and connection to filter reactor (external thread 3/4", flat-sealing)
connections
Max. connection cross-sections
- to the filter reactor (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 95
Dimensions
- Width mm 506 506 506 506
- Height mm 840 840 840 840
- Depth mm 574 574 574 574
Weight kg 110 110 110 110
manually closed. Therefore, we recommend that the circuit breaker is equipped with a locking set 3WL9111-0BA21-
0AA0.

Article number 6SL3305– 7TG37–4AA5 7TG41–0AA5 7TG41–3AA5 7TG41–6AA5

Suitable for Active Line Module 6SL3335- 7TG37-4AA3 7TG38-1AA3 7TG41-3AA3 7TG41-6AA3
Rated power of kW 800 900 1400 1700
Active Line Module 7TG41-0AA3
1100
Rated input current of the Active Line A 735 810 / 1025 1270 1560
Module
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 500 –10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
DC link capacitance
of the drive line-up, max. µF 153600 153600 153600 210000
Electronics current consumption A 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17
(24 V DC)
Bypass contactor 1) 3RT1476-6A36 3WL1212- 3WL1216- 3WL1216-
(3 x) 4BB34-4AN2-Z 4BB34-4AN2-Z 4BB34-4AN2-Z
Z=C22 3) Z=C22 3) Z=C22 3)
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 71 71 / 71 71 / 71 71 / 71
Frame size JIL JIL JIL JIL
Filter reactor
Article number 6SL3005- 0DG37-4AA0 0DG41-3AA0 0DG41-3AA0 0DG41-6AA0
Power loss, max. 2)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 5.5 6.2 9.3 11
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 5.5 6.2 9.3 11
Liquid volumes
- Integrated reactor cooler dm³ 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
- Hoses supplied dm³/m 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285
Return and connection to filter module (external thread 3/4", flat-sealing)
connections
U1, V1, W1 / U2, V2, W2
PE connection M10 bolts M10 bolts M10 bolts M10 bolts
- line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 1000 1500 1500 1500
- load connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 1000 1500 1500 1500
- to the filter Module (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 95
Dimensions
- Width mm 358 440 440 440
- Height mm 675 705 705 705
- Depth mm <575 <575 <575 <575
Weight kg 234 365 365 365


Filter module
Article number 6SL3005- 0FG37-4AA5 0FG41-0AA5 0FG41-3AA5 0FG41-6AA5
Power loss, max. 2)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 4.0 5.0 5.0 7.5
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 4.0 5.0 5.0 7.5
Liquid volumes of the filter module dm³ 1 1 1 1
Intake and connection to filter reactor (external thread 3/4", flat-sealing)
connections
- to the filter reactor (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 95
Dimensions
- Width mm 506 506 506 506
- Height mm 840 840 840 840
- Depth mm 574 574 574 574
Weight kg 110 110 110 110
manually closed. Therefore, we recommend that the circuit breaker is equipped with a locking set 3WL9111-0BA21-
0AA0.
4.4.9.1 Parameterization
The thresholds for the temperature monitoring must be parameterized correctly for safe
operation. This is realized automatically when commissioning the system using the STARTER
or Startdrive commissioning tool. When doing this, by selecting the Active Line Module, the
appropriate Active Interface Module is automatically assigned (p0220 "Infeed line filter
type").
The values for the temperature monitoring for liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules are set
as follows:
• Alarm threshold p3667: 60 °C
• Trip threshold p3668: 70 °C
Note
Note regarding STARTER V4.4.1
The product is supported from STARTER version V4.4.1.

Power Modules 5
5.1 Description
A Power Module is a power unit (frequency converter) that provides the power supply for the
connected motor. The power from the 3-phase system is supplied via the 6-pulse rectifier.
The output inverter produces a 3-phase, variable-voltage, variable-frequency system. A Power
Module must be connected to a Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The open-loop and closed-loop
control functions are stored in the Control Unit.
Table 5- 1 Power Modules
Frame size FL Frame size GL

Power Modules
5.1 Description
Characteristics of Power Modules

• Design for 3 AC 380 bis 3 AC 480 V from 210 A to 490 A
• Suitable for TN, TT, and IT supply systems
• Liquid cooled or water cooled
• Short-circuit/ground-fault-proof
• Electronic rating plate
• Operating status and error status via LEDs
• DRIVE-CLiQ interface for communication with the Control Unit and/or other components in
the drive line-up.
• Integration in system diagnostics
• The Power Modules communicate with the higher-level Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The
Control Unit in this case could be a CU310-2, CU320-2 or a SIMOTION D Control Unit.
• An external 24 V DC power supply is required to operate liquid-cooled/water-cooled Power
Modules.
• The correct line reactor must be connected in series to achieve a Category C3 radio
interference suppression according to EN 61800.
The volumetric flow of the coolant is monitored by the software. If the volumetric flow is
continuously lower than the setpoint, an alarm (A5005) is first displayed. If this alarm
remains active continually for the next 5 minutes, a fault message (F30047) is activated
which shuts down the unit.
The fans for the internal electronic circuitry are only switched on when required.
The fans are switched on and off as a function of several factors (e.g. heat sink temperature,
ambient temperature, output current, duty cycle, ...) which means that fan operating cycles
cannot be calculated directly.

Power Modules
5.2 Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
Electric shock or fire due to overcurrent protective equipment that trips too late
Overcurrent protective equipment that trips too late or not all can cause electric shock or
fire.
• To protect personnel and for fire protection purposes, at the infeed point, the short-
circuit rating and loop impedance must correspond to the specifications in the
documentation in order for the installed overcurrent protection devices to trip within the
specified time.
WARNING
interrupted
or serious injury.
conditions:
mm² Cu.
WARNING
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and reduced service
lives of Power Modules.
• Observe the cooling clearances above, below, and in front of the Power Modules which

Power Modules
CAUTION
Fire due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
Overheating and a fire can result when the total length of the power cables is exceeded.
• Ensure that the total length of the power cables (motor feeder cables and DC link cables)
does not exceed the values specified in the technical data.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by mechanically loaded busbars and liquid coolant
connections
Mechanically loaded busbars and liquid coolant connections can cause damage on the
device.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in faulty electrical connections. This
can cause fire damage or functional faults.
• Tighten all power connections with the specified tightening torques, e.g. line supply
connection, motor connection, DC-link connections.
• Check the tightening torques of all power connections at regular intervals and tighten
them when required. This applies in particular after transport.
NOTICE
Damage to the equipment when performing a voltage test as a result of connections
that are not disconnected
As part of routine tests, SINAMICS S components undergo a voltage test according to EN
61800-5-1.
• Disconnect or unplug all SINAMICS devices before the voltage test of the machine
equipment according to EN 60204-1, Section 18.4.
NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when DRIVE-CLiQ cables are
used that are either incorrect or have not been approved for this purpose.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been approved by Siemens for the
particular application.

Power Modules
5.3 Interface description
5.3.1 Overview
Figure 5-1 Power Module, frame size FL

Power Modules
Figure 5-2 Power Module, frame size GL

Power Modules
5.3.2 Connection example
Figure 5-3 Connection example for Power module

Power Modules
5.3.3 Line/DC link/motor connection
Table 5- 2 Line/DC link/motor connection for Power Module
Terminals Technical data

U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 Voltage:
3 AC power input
• 3 AC 380 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10 %
• 3 AC 500 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10 %
Connecting lugs: d = 13 mm (M12/50 Nm) for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234/DIN 46235 1)
DC link connection Voltage: 1.35 x Vline
DCP, DCN Connecting lugs: d = 13 mm (M12/50 Nm) for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234/DIN 46235 1)
U2, V2, W2 Voltage: 3 AC 0 V to 0.75 x DC link voltage 2)
3 AC power output Connecting lugs: d = 13 mm (M12/50 Nm) for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234/DIN 46235 1)
PE connection Connecting lugs: d = 13 mm (M12/50 Nm) for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234/DIN 46235 1)
1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "Cable lugs" in the appendix.
2) For pure space vector modulation, a factor of approximately 0.70 … 0.72 applies.
For edge modulation, a factor of approximately 0.74 … 0.75.
5.3.4 X9 terminal strip
Connector Terminal Signal name Technical data

1 P24 V External 24 V DC supply
1 P24 V Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
Power consumption: See Technical data
2 M
2 M
4
5 Main contactor control 240 V AC: 8 A max.
6 30 V DC: max. 1 A
isolated
7 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
8 EP M1 (Enable Pulses) Power consumption: 10 mA
The pulse inhibit function is only available when
the "Safety Integrated Basic Functions via
onboard terminals" is enabled in the software.
Note
Function of the EP terminals
The function of the EP terminals for pulse inhibit is only available if the "Safety Integrated
Basic Functions via onboard terminals" software is enabled.

Power Modules
Note
Looping through the supply voltage
The two "P24 V" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through, even when the connector is removed.
5.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection
Connector Terminal Function Technical data

1 EP M1 (Enable Pulses) Connected to terminal -X9:8
2 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Connected to terminal -X9:7
3 -Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130
4 +Temp / PT100 / PT1000 / PTC
WARNING
Electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Only use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety
isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.
NOTICE
Device failure as a result of unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature
sensors
Unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors can result in interference
being coupled into the signal processing electronics from the power side. This can result in
significant disturbance of all signals (fault messages) up to failure of individual components
(destruction of the devices).
• Only use shielded cables as temperature sensor cables.
• If temperature sensor cables are routed together with the motor cable, use separately
shielded cables twisted in pairs.
• Connect the cable shield to ground potential through a large surface area.

Power Modules
NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
If a KTY temperature sensor is connected with incorrect polarity, it is not possible to detect
when the motor overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.
Note
The temperature sensor connection can be used for motors that are equipped with a KTY84-
1C130, PT100, PT1000 or PTC measuring sensor in the stator windings.
Note
Connection to terminal strip -X9
A cable harness is used to connect terminals -X41:1 and -X41:2 to terminals -X9:8 and -X9:7.
Table 5- 5 Terminal strip X42 voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and Terminal Module

1 P24L Power supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and
2 Terminal Module (18 ... 28.8 V)
maximum load current: 3 A
3 M
4
Note
The terminal strip supplies power to the CU310-2 Control Unit via a cable harness supplied
with the device.
Note
Connection options of terminal strip X42
The terminal strip is not intended to supply other 24 VDC loads (for example, for supplying
other components on the plant/system side), as the voltage supply of the Control Interface
Module could also be overloaded and result in malfunctions.

Power Modules
5.3.7 X46 Brake control and monitoring
Table 5- 6 Terminal strip X46 brake control and monitoring

1 BR output + Brake connection
2 BR output - Supply voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current: 200 mA
3 FB input + Internal feedback signal from the Safe Brake
4 FB input - Adapter
Note
The interface is intended for connection of the Safe Brake Adapter.
WARNING
Fire due to overheating when the total length of the connecting cables is exceeded
Excessively long connection cables on terminal strip X46 can cause components to overheat
with the associated risk of fire and smoke.
• Limit the length of the connecting cables to a maximum of 10 m.
• The connection cable must not be led out the control cabinet or control cabinet group.
5.3.8 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402
Table 5- 7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402


Power Modules
Table 5- 8 Cooling circuit connections
Connection Technical data

Coolant connection A: Intake Pipe thread ISO 228 - G 3/4 B
Coolant connection B: Return (external thread 3/4", flat-sealing)
Tightening torque max. 60 Nm
Note
Replacement seal
thickness 1.5 mm.

Power Modules
5.3.10 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module
Table 5- 9 Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module
LED, state Description

READY DC LINK
Off Off The electronics power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green --- 1) The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC-link voltage is present.
Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage lies outside the permitted tolerance range.
Orange Orange DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red --- 1) This component has at least one fault.
Remark:
The LED is activated irrespective of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Flashing light 0.5 --- 1) Firmware is being downloaded.
Hz:
green/red
Flashing light 2 Hz: --- 1) Firmware download is complete. Waiting for POWER ON.
green/red
Flashing light 2 Hz: --- 1) Detection of the components via LED is activated (p0124).
green/orange Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via
red/orange p0124 = 1.
1) Irrespective of the status of the LED "DC LINK"
Table 5- 10 Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module
LED Color State Description

POWER OK Green Off DC link voltage or control voltage at -X9 too low.
On The component is ready for operation.
Flashing There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed
light a POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.
WARNING
Electric shock when live parts of the DC link are touched
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the status of the "DC
LINK" LED. This means that when live parts are touched, this can result in death or serious
injury.
• Observe the warning information on the component.

Power Modules
5.4 Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing for frame size FL

Figure 5-4 Dimension drawing Power Module, frame size FL. Front view, side view

Power Modules
Dimension drawing for frame size GL

Figure 5-5 Dimension drawing Power Module, frame size GL. Front view, side view

Power Modules
5.5 Installation
5.5 Installation
Figure 5-6 Crane lifting lugs / screw coupling points for mechanical support
Protection guard
A protection guard is mounted on the bottom of the Power Module ("1" in the diagram
below) for use during transportation. The Power Module can be placed down on this
protection guard while it is removed from the packaging and during transportation.
Before the module is installed at its final location, this guard must be removed. To do this,
remove the four screws ("2" in the diagram) and remove the guard.
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to toppling when placing down on the protection guard
A module placed down on the protection guard can topple over therefore causing injury.
• When the module is placed down on the protection guard, ensure that it cannot topple
over.

Power Modules
5.5 Installation
Figure 5-7 Protection guard
Note
Mounting fixture for power units
The mounting equipment for the power units can be used to mount the Power Modules, see
"Mounting equipment for power units (Page 347)".
Crane lifting lugs

Power Modules are fitted with crane lifting lugs as standard when shipped. The units can be
hoisted using these lugs and transported from the pallet to the installation location.
Note
Transport in the horizontal position
Transport in the horizontal position is permissible.
It is not permissible to screw the crane lifting lug into the thread at the lower side of the
Power Module.

Power Modules
5.5 Installation
NOTICE
Improper transport can cause mechanical loads on the housing or busbars which can result
in damage to the device.
• Use a lifting harness with vertical ropes or chains during transport.
• Do not use the busbars as handles or for fastening a lifting harness.
• Only tighten the crane lifting lugs by hand. Remove the crane lifting lugs after the
installation, but keep them for later use.
Screw coupling points for mechanical support

The Power Modules are provided with screw coupling points at the top and bottom so that
they can be connected to modules mounted adjacently; see the diagram at the beginning of
the chapter.
If several modules are mounted adjacent to one another, they can be interconnected via the
screw coupling points. When a single module is installed, lateral support can be provided by
means of reinforcing plates inserted between the module and the cabinet.
WARNING
Electric shock due to insufficient insulating clearance (air clearances and creepage
distances)
Incorrect mounting of the reinforcing sheet metal parts can result in insufficient insulating
clearance to live parts and can cause death or serious injury.
• Ensure that the reinforcing sheet metal parts do not come into contact with live parts
and that an insulation clearance (air clearances and creepage distances) of >13 mm /
25 mm is always maintained.
• As a result of customer specifications or the specifications of certification bodies, under
certain circumstances, larger air clearances and creepage distances may be required.
Take this into account for the mechanical design of the cabinet and when installing.

Power Modules
5.6 Electrical connection
5.6 Electrical connection
Operating a Power Module on a non-grounded supply system/IT system

If the device is operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system), the connection clip to the
basic interference suppression module must be removed.
To do so, loosen the two screws ("1" in the following diagram) and remove the connection
bracket. Once you have loosened the screws, turn the connection bracket to the side (to the
right) first and then pull it forwards out of the unit.
Figure 5-8 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module

Power Modules
NOTICE
line supply
5.7.1 Power Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
Table 5- 11 Technical data, Power Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
Article number 6SL3315– 1TE32-1AA3 1TE32–6AA3 1TE33–1AA3 1TE35–0AA3

Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 110 132 160 250
- Based on IH (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 90 110 132 200
- Based on IL (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 150 200 250 400
- Based on IH (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 150 200 200 350
Output current
- Rated current IN A A 210 260 310 490
- Base load current IL A 205 250 302 477
- Base load current IH A 178 233 277 438
- Max. output current Imax A A 307 375 453 715
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 –10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.35 x Uline
- Output voltage VACrms 0 ... 0.75 x DC link voltage
Input current
- Rated current IN E A 230 285 340 540
- Maximum current Imax E A 336 411 496 788
Rated pulse frequency kHz 2 2 2 2
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 2 2 2 2
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 8 8 8 8
Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5
Cooling method Liquid cooling with integrated stainless steel heat exchanger
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 2.42 3.04 3.4 5.43
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 2.6 3.2 3.6 5.7
Pressure drop, typical Pa 70000 70000 70000 70000
at the rated flow rate 4)

Power Modules
Article number 6SL3315– 1TE32-1AA3 1TE32–6AA3 1TE33–1AA3 1TE35–0AA3

Liquid volume of integrated heat exchanger dm3 0.52 0.52 0.88 0.88
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 52 52 52 52
Line/DC link/motor connection Flat connection for M12 screw
- Line connection (U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3) mm² 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 240 2 x 240
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 240 2 x 240
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 2 x 95 2 x 95 2 x 240 2 x 240
Max. cable length m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
Dimensions
- Width mm 265 265 265 265
- Height mm 836 836 983 983
- Depth mm 549 549 549 549
Frame size FL FL GL GL
Weight kg 77 77 108 108
Recommended fuse 5) 3NE1230-2 3NE1331-2 3NE1333-2 3NE1230-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 1 2
- Rated current A 315 350 450 315
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 1 1 2 1
Minimum short-circuit current 6) kA 3 3.6 4.4 8
1) Rated power of a typical standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 400 V 3 AC 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 460 V 3 AC 60 Hz.
4) This value applies to the water coolant option; for other coolant types, see Chapter "Cooling circuit and coolant proper-
ties".
5) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
6) Minimum current required so that protective devices reliably respond and trip.
5.7.2 Overload capability

The Power Modules have an overload reserve (e.g. to overcome breakaway torques).
In the case of drives with overload requirements, the appropriate base-load current must,
therefore, be used as a basis for the required load.
The overload data is valid under the precondition that the Power Module is operated as a
maximum with its base load current before and after the overload occurs (a duty cycle
duration of 300 s is used as a basis here).
Another precondition is that the Power Module is operated at its factory-set pulse frequency
at output frequencies > 10 Hz.
Additional information on the overload capability is provided in the Low Voltage
Configuration Manual and in the SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions.

Power Modules
Low overload
The base load current for low overload (IL) is based on a load duty cycle of 110% for 60 s or
150% for 10 s.
Figure 5-9 Low overload
High overload
The base load current for a high overload IH is based on a duty cycle of 150% for 60 s or 160%
for 10 s.
Figure 5-10 High overload

Power Modules
5.7.3 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency

When the pulse frequency is increased, the derating factor of the output current must be
taken into account.
This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified in the technical data.
Table 5- 12 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for units with a rated pulse frequency
of 2 kHz
Article No. Type rating Output current Derating factor at the pulse frequency
at 2 kHz
6SL3315-... [kW] [A] 2.5 kHz 4 kHz 5 kHz 7.5 kHz 8 kHz
1TE32-1AA3 110 210 95 % 82 % 74 % 54 % 50 %
1TE32-6AA3 132 260 95 % 83 % 74 % 54 % 50 %
1TE33-1AA3 160 310 97 % 88 % 78 % 54 % 50 %
1TE35-0AA3 250 490 94 % 78 % 71 % 53 % 50 %
Note
Derating factors for pulse frequencies in the range between fixed values
For pulse frequencies in the range between the specified fixed values, the relevant derating
factors can be determined by linear interpolation.
Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency

The adjustable pulse frequencies - and therefore the output frequencies that can be achieved
with the factory-set current controller clock cycles - are listed below.
Table 5- 13 Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency
Current controller Adjustable pulse Maximum achievable output frequency fA

clock cycle frequencies
V/f operating mode Vector operating Servo mode
TI fp
mode
250 µs 2 kHz 166 Hz 166 Hz 333 Hz
4 kHz 333 Hz 333 Hz 550 Hz 1)
8 kHz 550 Hz 1) 480 Hz 550 Hz 1)
1) With the "High output frequencies" license, which can be ordered as option J01 on the CompactFlash card for SINAMICS
S120, the maximum output frequency is increased up to 650 Hz.
Refer to the Low Voltage Configuration Manual for current controller clock cycles deviating
from the factory setting.

Power Modules

Line Modules 6
6.1 Introduction
The drive line-up is connected to the power supply network via the Line Modules.
Line Infeeds comprise a Line Module and the associated line connection. They generate a DC
voltage from the connected line voltage that is used to supply the connected Motor Modules.
Line Modules and Interface Modules are suitable for direct operation on TN, IT and TT
systems.
General characteristics of the Line Modules

• Supply voltage:
– 3 AC 380 V –10% (-15% < 1 min) to 3 AC 480 V +10% (47 to 63 Hz)
– 3 AC 500 V –10% (-15% < 1 min) to 3 AC 690 V +10% (47 to 63 Hz)
• Suitable for TN, TT, and IT supply systems

Line Modules
6.2 Basic Line Modules
6.2.1 Description
Basic Line Modules are used for the power infeed into the DC link.
They are suitable for applications in which no regenerative energy is produced, or in which
the energy exchange takes place between the motor- and the generator-driven axes in the
DC link.
The DC link voltage is greater than the rms value of the line voltage by a factor of 1.35 (under
partial load) or 1.32 (under full load).
Table 6- 1 Overview of Basic Line Modules
Frame size FBL Frame size GBL

Line Modules
Components of the Basic infeed

A Basic Infeed comprises a Basic Line Module and an external line connection, which
comprises a line reactor.
Operating principle
One or more Motor Modules can be connected to the power supply network via the Basic
Line Module. The Basic Line Module provides the DC link voltage for the Motor Modules.
The Basic Line Module is suitable for direct operation both on TN and on IT and TT systems.
An external 24 V DC power supply is required to operate liquid-cooled Basic Line Modules.
Parallel connection of Basic Line Modules to increase power rating

Up to four Basic Line Modules with the same power rating can be connected in parallel in
order to increase power.
The following rules must be observed when connecting Basic Line Modules in parallel:
• Up to 4 identical Basic Line Modules can be connected in parallel.
• A common Control Unit is required whenever the modules are connected in parallel.
• With multiple infeeds, power must be supplied to the systems from a common infeed
point (i.e. different supply systems are not permitted).
• A line reactor must be series-connected to every parallel-connected Basic Line Module.
• A derating factor of 7.5 % must be taken into consideration, regardless of the number of
modules connected in parallel.
Note
Mixed operation is not possible
It is only possible to connect power units in parallel if all of them have the same hardware
version. Mixed operation between a power unit with Control Interface Module (article
number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA3) and a power unit with Control Interface Board (article number
6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA0) is not possible.

Line Modules
WARNING
DANGER
Electric shock due to a high DC link voltage
As long as the Line Module is connected to the line supply, the DC link is charged with a
high voltage. Contact with components leads to death or serious injury.
• Isolate the Line Module from the line supply during installation of maintenance work,
e.g. via the line contactor or main switch.
WARNING
fire.
specified time.
WARNING
interrupted
or serious injury.
conditions:
mm² Cu.

Line Modules
WARNING
lives of Line Modules.
• Observe the cooling clearances above, below, and in front of the Line Modules which are
CAUTION
Fire due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
NOTICE
Material damage caused by mechanically loaded busbars and liquid coolant
connections
Mechanically loaded busbars and liquid coolant connections can cause damage on the
device.
NOTICE
NOTICE
61800-5-1.

Line Modules
NOTICE

Line Modules
6.2.3.1 Overview
Figure 6-1 Basic Line Module, frame size FBL

Line Modules
Figure 6-2 Basic Line Module, frame size GBL

Line Modules
Figure 6-3 Connection example for Basic Line Modules

Line Modules
Table 6- 2 Line/load connection of the Basic Line Module
Terminals Technical specifications

U1, V1, W1 Voltage:
3 AC power input
• 3 AC 380 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10 %
• 3 AC 500 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10 %
Connecting thread: M12/50 Nm for busbar connection
DCP, DCN Voltage:
DC power output
• 513 ... 648 V DC
• 675 ... 932 V DC
Connecting thread: M12/50 Nm for busbar connection
PE connection Connecting thread: M12/50 Nm for busbar connection

1 P24 V Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
Current consumption: See Technical data
2 M
2 M
4
5 Main contactor control 240 V AC: 8 A max.
6 30 V DC: max. 1 A
isolated
7 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
8 EP M1 (Enable Pulses) Current consumption: 10 mA
Note
Connection to terminals 7 and 8
For operation, 24 V DC must be connected to terminal 7 and ground to terminal 8. Pulse
suppression is activated when removed.
Note

Line Modules
6.2.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection

3 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-
4 + Temp 1C130 / PT1000 / PTC
WARNING
isolation.
Module TM120.
NOTICE
sensors
NOTICE

Line Modules
Note
1C130, PT1000 or PTC measuring sensor in the stator windings.
Note

3 M
4
Note
Module could also be overloaded and possibly result in malfunctions.

Line Modules
6.2.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

6.2.3.8 Cooling circuit connections

Note
Replacement seal
thickness 1.5 mm.

Line Modules
6.2.3.9 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module
Table 6- 8 Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module

READY DC LINK
place.
place.
place.
Remark:
reconfigured.
Hz:
green/red
green/red
green/orange Note:
Table 6- 9 Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module

WARNING
injury.

Line Modules
Dimension drawing, frame size FBL

Figure 6-4 Dimension drawing, Basic Line Module, frame size GBL. Front view, side view

Line Modules
Dimension drawing, frame size GBL

Figure 6-5 Dimension drawing, Basic Line Module, frame size GBL. Front view, side view

Line Modules
6.2.5 Installation
Figure 6-6 Lifting lugs / screw coupling points for mechanical support
Protection guard
A protection guard is mounted on the bottom of the Basic Line Module ("1" in the diagram
below) for use during transportation. The Basic Line Module can be rested on this protection
guard while it is removed from the packaging and during transportation.
CAUTION
over.

Line Modules
Note
The mounting fixture for power units can be used to mount Basic Line Modules, see
Lifting lugs
Basic Line Modules are fitted with lifting lugs as standard when shipped. The units can be
lifted from these lugs by a crane and transported from the pallet to the installation location.
Note
It is not permissible to screw the crane lifting lug into the thread at the lower side of the Line
Module.

Line Modules
NOTICE

Since the Basic Line Modules are housed in a very slim enclosure, they need to be
mechanically supported against lateral movement and vibration if they are installed in a
control cabinet. Screw coupling points are provided at the top and bottom of the units for
this purpose.
WARNING
distances)
Operating a Basic Line Module on a non-grounded line supply (IT system)

If the device is operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system), the connection clip to the
basic interference suppression module must be removed.
To do so, loosen the two screws ("1" in the figure below) and pull the connection bracket
towards you out of the device.

Line Modules
Figure 6-8 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module
NOTICE
line supply

Line Modules
6.2.7 Technical specifications
6.2.7.1 Basic Line Modules, 380 ... 480 V 3 AC
Table 6- 10 Technical data for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
Article number 6SL3335– 1TE37–4AA3 1TE41–2AA3 1TE41–7AA3

Rated power
- At IL DC (50Hz 400V) kW 360 600 830
- At IH DC (50Hz 400V) kW 280 450 650
- At IL DC (60Hz 460V) HP 555 925 1280
- At IH DC (60Hz 460V) HP 430 690 1000
DC-link current
- Rated current IN DC A 740 1220 1730
- Rated current IL DC A 710 1171 1660
- Base load current IH DC A 578 936 1350
- Maximum current Imax DC 1) A 1110 1830 2595
Input current
- Rated current IN E A 610 1000 1420
- Maximum current Imax E A 915 1500 2130
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.35 x Uline (partial load) / 1.32 x Uline (full load)
Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 0.7 0.7 0.7
Cooling method Liquid cooling with integrated aluminum heat exchanger
Power loss, max. 2)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 2.95 4.77 6.39
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 2.95 4.77 6.39
- Dissipated to the ambient air kW 0.25 0.41 0.57
Rated flow rate l/min 9 9 12
Pressure drop, typical Pa 70000 70000 70000
Liquid volume of integrated heat exchanger dm³ 0.45 0.45 0.79
DC-link capacitance
- Basic Line Module µF 12000 20300 26100
- Drive line-up, max. µF 96000 162400 208800
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 54 56 56
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar
- PE connection mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 2600 4000 4800
- Unshielded m 3900 6000 7200

Line Modules
Article number 6SL3335– 1TE37–4AA3 1TE41–2AA3 1TE41–7AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 160 160 160
- Height mm 1137 1137 1562
- Depth mm 545 545 545
Frame size FBL FBL GBL
Weight kg 108 108 185
Recommended fuse 4) 3NE1333-2 3NE1435-2 3NE1438-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 2 5) 2 5) 2 5)
- Rated current A 450 560 800
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 2 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 6) kA 8.8 12.4 20
1) Valid for a 5 s duty cycle (overload duration) and a duty cycle duration of 300 s based on the base load DC-link current
IH_DC.
ties".
5) When using fuses connected in parallel in each phase, if one fuse ruptures, then all of the fuses must be replaced.

Line Modules
6.2.7.2 Basic Line Modules, 500 ... 690 V 3 AC
Table 6- 11 Technical data for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V

Rated power
- At IL DC (50Hz 690V) kW 355 630 1100 1370
- At IH DC (50Hz 690V) kW 275 475 840 1070
- At IL DC (50Hz 500V) kW 245 420 750 950
- At IH DC (50Hz 500V) kW 200 345 610 775
- At IL DC (60Hz 575V) HP 395 705 1230 1530
- At IH DC (60Hz 575V) HP 305 530 940 1195
DC-link current
- Rated current IN DC A 420 730 1300 1650
- Rated current IL DC A 403 700 1248 1584
- Base load current IH DC A 328 570 1014 1287
- Maximum current Imax DC 1) A 630 1095 1950 2475
Input current
- Maximum current Imax E A 510 900 1605 2025
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.35 x Uline (partial load) / 1.32 x Uline (full load)
Power loss, max. 2)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 1.76 3.09 5.09 6.25
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 1.76 3.09 5.09 6.25
Liquid volume of integrated heat exchanger dm³ 0.45 0.45 0.79 0.79
DC-link capacitance
- Basic Line Module µF 4800 7700 15500 19300
- Drive line-up, max. µF 38400 61600 124000 154400
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 54 54 56 56
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
- PE connection mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
Max. cable length
- Shielded m 1500 1500 2250 2250
- Unshielded m 2250 2250 3375 3375
Dimensions
- Width mm 160 160 160 160
- Height mm 1137 1137 1562 1562
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545
Frame size FBL FBL GBL GBL

Line Modules

Weight kg 108 108 185 185
Recommended fuse 4) 3NE1333-2 3NE1331-2 3NE1447-2 3NE1435-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 2 5) 2 5) 3 5)
- Rated current A 450 350 670 560
Minimum short-circuit current 6) kA 4.4 7.2 16.8 18.9
1) Valid for a 5 s duty cycle (overload duration) and a duty cycle duration of 300 s based on the base load DC-link current
IH_DC.
ties".

Line Modules
6.2.7.3 Overload capability

The Basic Line Modules have an overload reserve.
The criterion for overload is that the Basic Line Module is operated as a maximum with its
base load current before and after the overload occurs (a load duration of 300 s is used as a
basis here).
High overload
The base load current for a high overload IH_DC is based on a duty cycle of 150 % for 60 s; the
max. current Imax_DC can flow for 5 s.

Line Modules
6.3 Active Line Modules
6.3.1 Description
The self-commutating infeed / regenerative feedback units act as step-up converters and
generate a stabilized DC link voltage that is 1.5x greater (factory setting) than the rated line
supply voltage. In this way, the connected Motor Modules are isolated from the line voltage.
This improves the dynamic response and control quality because line tolerances and
fluctuations do not affect the motor voltage.
Active Line Module can be used to implement reactive power compensation by specifying an
additive reactive current.
Table 6- 12 Overview of Active Line Modules
Frame size GXL Frame size HXL Frame size JXL

Line Modules
Active Infeed components

An Active Infeed comprises an Active Interface Module and an Active Line Module.
The bypass contactor is fitted in the relevant Active Interface Module on Active Infeeds which
feature an Active Line Module of frame size GXL. Active Interface Modules in these frame
sizes have degree of protection IP20; Active Line Modules in these frame sizes have degree of
protection IP00.
Figure 6-10 Overview of Active Infeeds, frame size GXL
In the case of an Active Infeed with an Active Line Module of frame sizes HXL or JXL, the
bypass contactor is not included in the associated Active Interface Module, but must be
provided separately. The Active Interface Modules and Active Line Modules of this frame size
have degree of protection IP00.
Figure 6-11 Overview of Active Infeeds, frame sizes HI/HXL and JI/JXL

Line Modules
Active Interface Module and Active Line Module assignment

The assignment of the Active Interface Modules (liquid cooled and air cooled) to the liquid-
cooled Active Line Modules is shown in the following table.
Table 6- 13 Active Interface Module and Active Line Module assignment
Suitable for Active Line Rated power of the Active Line Active Interface Modules, Active Interface Modules,
Module chassis format, Modules at 400 V or 690 V liquid-cooled air-cooled
liquid cooled kW Article No. Article No.
6SL3335-7TE35-0AA3 300 – 1) 6SL3300-7TE35-0AA1
6SL3335-7TE36-1AA3 380 6SL3305-7TE38-4AA5
6SL3335-7TE38-4AA3 500 6SL3305-7TE38-4AA5
6SL3335-7TE41-0AA3 630 6SL3305-7TE41-4AA5
6SL3335-7TE41-4AA3 900 6SL3305-7TE41-4AA5
6SL3335-7TG35-8AA3 630 – 1) 6SL3300-7TG35-8AA1
6SL3335-7TG37-4AA3 800 6SL3305-7TG37-4AA5
6SL3335-7TG38-1AA3 900 6SL3305-7TG41-0AA5
6SL3335-7TG41-0AA3 1100 6SL3305-7TG41-0AA5
6SL3335-7TG41-3AA3 1400 6SL3305-7TG41-3AA5
6SL3335-7TG41-6AA3 1700 6SL3305-7TG41-6AA5
1) No liquid-cooled Active Interface Modules are available for these rated powers. Alternatively, air-cooled devices can be
used.
Operating principle
One or more Motor Modules can be connected to the power supply network via the Active
Line Module. The Active Line Module provides a constant DC link voltage for the Motor
Modules. This ensures that they are not influenced by line voltage fluctuations. The
regenerative feedback capability of the Active Line Module can be deactivated by
parameterization.
The Active Line Module is suitable for direct operation both on TN and on IT and TT systems.
With the motors operating as generators, the Active Line Module feeds regenerative energy
into the supply network.
The Active Line Module is used for:
• Machines with high dynamic drive requirements
• Frequent braking cycles and high braking energy.

Line Modules
The fans for the internal device electronics are only switched on when required.
An external 24 V DC power supply is required to operate the Active Line Modules.
Parallel connection of Active Line Modules to increase power rating

Up to four Active Line Modules with the same power rating can be connected in parallel in
order to increase power.
The following rules must be observed when connecting Active Line Modules in parallel:
• Up to 4 identical Active Line Modules can be connected in parallel.
• Each Active Line Module requires its own Active Interface Module.
• With multiple infeeds, power must be supplied to the systems from a common infeed
point (i.e. different supply systems are not permitted).
• A derating factor of 5% must be taken into consideration, regardless of the number of
modules connected in parallel.
Note

Line Modules
WARNING
DANGER
Electric shock due to a high DC link voltage
As long as the Line Module is connected to the line supply, the DC link is charged with a
high voltage. Contact with components leads to death or serious injury.
• Isolate the Line Module from the line supply during installation of maintenance work,
e.g. via the line contactor or main switch.
WARNING
fire.
specified time.
WARNING
interrupted
or serious injury.
conditions:
mm² Cu.

Line Modules
WARNING
lives of Line Modules.
• Observe the cooling clearances above, below, and in front of the Line Modules which are
CAUTION
Fire hazard due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
61800-5-1.

Line Modules
NOTICE
Note
Operation on line supplies where energy recovery is not possible
In line supply systems without energy recovery capability (e.g. a diesel generator), device
faults can occur as the braking energy cannot be dissipated.
• For line supplies without regenerative feedback capability (e.g. diesel generator),
deactivate the regenerative feedback capability of the Line Modules using the appropriate
parameter (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual).
• The braking energy must then be dissipated via an additional Braking Module with braking
resistor in the drive line-up.

Line Modules
6.3.3.1 Overview
Figure 6-12 Active Line Module, frame size GXL

Line Modules
Figure 6-13 Active Line Module, frame size HXL

Line Modules
Figure 6-14 Active Line Module, frame size JXL

Line Modules
Figure 6-15 Example connection of Active Line Module

Line Modules
Table 6- 14 Line/load connection of the Active Line Module
Terminals Technical specifications

U1, V1, W1 Voltage:
3 AC power input
• 3 AC 380 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10 %
• 3 AC 500 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10 %
Connecting lugs:
• Frame sizes FXL, GXL, HXL: d = 13 mm (M12/50 Nm) for cable lugs in accordance with
DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame size JXL: d = 13 mm (M12/50 Nm) for busbar connection
DCP, DCN Voltage:
DC power output
• 570 ... 720 V DC
• 750 ... 1035 V DC
Connecting lugs: d = 13 mm (M12/50 Nm) for busbar connection
PE connection Connecting lugs:
DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
1 ) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "cable lugs" in the appendix.

1 P24 V Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 M
2 M
3 Bypass contactor control for Active Interface Module, -X609;11
4 for Active Interface Module, -X609;12
5 Pre-charge contactor for Active Interface Module, -X609;9
6 control for Active Interface Module, -X609;10

Line Modules
Note
Connection to terminals 7 and 8
For operation, 24 V DC must be connected to terminal 7 and ground to terminal 8. Pulse
suppression is activated when removed.
Note
6.3.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection

3 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-
4 + Temp 1C130 / PT1000 / PTC
WARNING
isolation.
Module TM120.

Line Modules
NOTICE
sensors
NOTICE
NOTICE
Looping in the circuit breaker into the EP terminal circuit for infeed units capable of
energy recovery
If, for infeed units capable of energy recovery, the upstream circuit breaker is not controlled
from the SINAMICS drive group, when the circuit breaker is opened, this can cause damage
in the line section that was shutdown. As a consequence, in the line section involved - under
certain circumstances - connected components can be damaged as a result of overvoltage.
• If, for infeed units capable of energy recovery, the upstream circuit breaker is not
controlled from the SINAMICS drive group, then an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker
should be looped into the EP terminal circuit.
Note
1C130, PT1000 or PTC measuring sensor in the stator windings.
Note

Line Modules

3 M
4
Note
6.3.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402


Line Modules
6.3.3.8 Cooling circuit connections

Note
Replacement seal
thickness 1.5 mm.

Line Modules
6.3.3.9 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module
Table 6- 20 Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module

READY DC LINK
place.
place.
place.
Remark:
reconfigured.
Flashing light 0.5 Hz: --- 1) Firmware is being downloaded.
green/red
green/red
green/orange Note:
Table 6- 21 Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module

WARNING
injury.

Line Modules
Dimension drawing for frame size GXL

Figure 6-16 Dimension drawing Active Line Module, frame size GXL Front view, side view

Line Modules
Dimension drawing, frame size HXL

Figure 6-17 Dimension drawing Active Line Module, frame size HXL Front view, side view

Line Modules
Dimension drawing for frame size JXL

Figure 6-18 Dimension drawing Active Line Module, frame size JXL, article numbers
6SL3335-7TE41-0AA3, 6SL3335-7TE41-4AA3, 6SL3335-7TG41-0AA3,
6SL3335-7TG41-3AA3. Front view, side view

Line Modules
Figure 6-19 Dimension drawing Active Line Module, frame size JXL, article number
6SL3335-7TG41-6AA3. Front view, side view

Line Modules
6.3.5 Installation
Protection guard
A protection guard is mounted on the bottom of the Active Line Module ("1" in the diagram
below) while it is being transported. The Active Line Module can be placed down on this
protection guard while it is removed from the packaging and while being transported.
remove the 4 screws ("2" in the diagram) and remove the guard.
CAUTION
over.

Line Modules
Note
The mounting equipment for power units can be used to mount the Active Line Module, see
Crane lifting lugs

Active Line Modules are fitted with crane lifting lugs as standard when shipped. The units can
be hoisted using these lugs and transported from the pallet to the installation location.
Note
It is not permissible to screw the crane lifting lug into the thread at the lower side of the Line
Module.

Line Modules
NOTICE

Since the Active Line Modules are housed in a very slim enclosure, they need to be
mechanically supported against lateral movement and vibration if they are installed in a
control cabinet. Screw coupling points are provided at the top and bottom of the units for
this purpose.
WARNING
distances)

Line Modules
6.3.6 Technical specifications
6.3.6.1 Active Line Modules, 380 ... 480 V 3 AC
Table 6- 22 Technical data for Active Line Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 1

Rated power
- At IL DC (50Hz 400V) kW 300 380 500 630
- At IH DC (50Hz 400V) kW 270 335 465 545
- At IL DC (60Hz 460V) HP 500 600 700 900
- At IH DC (60Hz 460V) HP 400 500 700 800
DC-link current
- Base load current IL DC A 535 661 917 1075
- Rated current IH DC A 489 603 837 982
Supply voltages
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
Infeed/regenerative feedback current
- Maximum current Imax E2) A 735 907 1260 1477
Pulse frequency kHz 4 2.5 2.5 2.5
Cooling method Liquid cooling with integrated heat exchanger made of
Stainless steel Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 3.1 4.82 5.3 7.9
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 3.36 5.25 5.75 8.53
DC link capacitance
- Active Line Module µF 9600 12600 17400 18900
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 52 54 54 56
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 240 4 x 185 4 x 185 Busbar
- PE connection mm² 2 x 240 4 x 185 4 x 185 Busbar
Max. cable length
- Shielded m 2700 3900 3900 3900
- Unshielded m 4050 5850 5850 5850

Line Modules

Dimensions
- Width mm 150 265 265 295
- Height mm 1172 1002 1002 1516
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545
Frame size GXL HXL HXL JXL
Weight kg 80 110 110 220
Recommended fuse 3NE1436-2 5) 3NE1438-2 5) 3NE1334-2 5) 3NE1436-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 2 6) 2 6)
- Rated current A 630 800 500 630
Minimum short-circuit current 7) kA 8 9.2 10.4 16
1) Valid for a 5s duty cycle (overload duration) and a duty cycle duration of 300s based on the rated DC-link current.
2) Valid for a 5s duty cycle (overload duration) and a duty cycle duration of 300s based on the rated infeed/regenerative
feedback current.
ties".
7) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Line Modules

Rated power
- At IL DC (50Hz 400V) kW 900
- At IH DC (50Hz 400V) kW 780
- At IL DC (60Hz 460V) HP 1250
- At IH DC (60Hz 460V) HP 1000
DC-link current
- Rated current IN DC A 1573
- Base load current IL DC A 1534
- Rated current IH DC A 1401
- Maximum current Imax DC 1) A 2361
Supply voltages
- Rated current IN E A 1405
- Maximum current Imax E2) A 2055
Pulse frequency kHz 2.5
Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 1.6
Cooling method Liquid cooling with integrated heat exchanger made of
aluminum
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 10.2
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 11.19
- Dissipated to the ambient air kW 0.62
Rated flow rate l/min 27
Pressure drop, typical Pa 70000
Liquid volume of integrated heat exchanger dm³ 1.56
DC link capacitance
- Active Line Module µF 28800
- Drive line-up, max. µF 230400
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 54
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² Busbar
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar
- PE connection mm² Busbar
Max. cable length
- Shielded m 3900
- Unshielded m 5850
Dimensions
- Width mm 295
- Height mm 1516
- Depth mm 545
Frame size JXL
Weight kg 220

Line Modules

Recommended fuse 3NE1448-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 2 5)
- Rated current A 850
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3
Minimum short-circuit current 6) kA 21
feedback current.
ties".

Line Modules
6.3.6.2 Active Line Modules, 500 ... 690 V 3 AC
Article number 6SL3335– 7TG35–8AA3 7TG37-4AA3 7TG38-1AA3 7TG41–0AA3

Rated power
- At IL DC (50Hz 690V) kW 630 800 900 1100
- At IH DC (50Hz 690V) kW 620 705 670 1000
- At IL DC (50Hz 500V) kW 447 560 620 780
- At IH DC (50Hz 500V) kW 450 510 485 710
- At IL DC (60Hz 575V) HP 675 900 975 1250
- At IH DC (60Hz 575V) HP 506 600 765 1000
DC-link current
- Base load current IL DC A 627 800 883 1193
- Rated current IH DC A 573 732 808 936
Supply voltages
- Maximum current Imax E2) A 862 1100 1214 1537
Pulse frequency kHz 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 5.6 7.65 8.5 10.9
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 4.9 6.67 7.4 9.53
DC link capacitance
- Active Line Module µF 9670 10500 10500 16000
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 54 54 54 56
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 4 x 185 4 x 185 4 x 185 Busbar
Max. cable length
- Shielded m 2250 2250 2250 2250
- Unshielded m 3375 3375 3375 3375
Dimensions
- Width mm 265 265 265 295
- Height mm 1002 1002 1002 1516
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545

Line Modules
Article number 6SL3335– 7TG35–8AA3 7TG37-4AA3 7TG38-1AA3 7TG41–0AA3

Frame size HXL HXL HXL JXL
Weight kg 110 110 110 220
Recommended fuse 3NE1447-2 5) 3NE1448-2 3NE1435-2 3NE1436-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 2 6) 2 6)
- Rated current A 670 850 560 630
Minimum short-circuit current 7) kA 8.4 10.5 12.6 16
feedback current.
ties".

Line Modules
Article number 6SL3335– 7TG41–3AA3 7TG41-6AA3

Rated power
- At IL DC (50Hz 690V) kW 1400 1700
- At IH DC (50Hz 690V) kW 1215 1490
- At IL DC (50Hz 500V) kW 965 1180
- At IH DC (50Hz 500V) kW 880 1080
- At IL DC (60Hz 575V) HP 1500 1855
- At IH DC (60Hz 575V) HP 1250 1530
DC-link current
- Rated current IN DC A 1422 1740
- Base load current IL DC A 1386 1700
- Rated current IH DC A 1266 1550
- Maximum current Imax DC 1) A 2133 2620
Supply voltages
- Rated current IN E A 1270 1560
- Maximum current Imax E2) A 1905 2055
Pulse frequency kHz 2.5 2.5
Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 1.46 1.5
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 13.55 17.96
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 11.85 15.7
- Dissipated to the ambient air kW 0.57 0.79
Rated flow rate l/min 27 27
Pressure drop, typical Pa 70000 70000
Liquid volume of integrated heat exchanger dm³ 1.56 1.56
DC link capacitance
- Active Line Module µF 19330 21000
- Drive line-up, max. µF 153600 210000
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 56 56
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² Busbar Busbar
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar
- PE connection mm² Busbar Busbar
Max. cable length
- Shielded m 2250 2250
- Unshielded m 3375 3375
Degree of protection IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 295 295
- Height mm 1516 1516
- Depth mm 545 545
Frame size JXL JXL
Weight kg 220 230

Line Modules
Article number 6SL3335– 7TG41–3AA3 7TG41-6AA3

Recommended fuse 3NE1438-2 5) 3NE1436-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 2 6) 3 6)
- Rated current A 800 630
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 7) kA 20 24
feedback current.
ties".

Line Modules
6.3.6.3 Overload capability

The Active Line Modules have an overload reserve.
The criterion for overload is that the Active Line Module is operated as a maximum with its
base load current before and after the overload occurs (a duty cycle duration of 300 s is used
as a basis here).
High overload
The base load current for a high overload IH_DC is based on a duty cycle of 150 % for 60 s; the
max. current Imax_DC can flow for 5 s.

Motor Modules 7
7.1 Description
A Motor Module is a power unit (DC-AC inverter) that provides the power supply for the
motor connected to it. Power is supplied by means of the DC link of the drive unit. A Motor
Module must be connected to a Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The open-loop and closed-loop
control functions are stored in the Control Unit.
Table 7- 1 Overview of Motor Modules
Frame size FXL Frame size GXL Frame size HXL Frame size JXL

Motor Modules
7.1 Description
Characteristics of the Motor Modules

• Version for 510 ... 720 V DC (line voltage 380 ... 480 V 3 AC) from 210 to 1405 A
Version for 675 ... 1035 V DC (line voltage 500 ... 690 V 3 AC) from 100 to 1560 A
• Liquid cooling
• Short-circuit/ground-fault-proof
• Electronic rating plate
• DRIVE-CLiQ interface for communication with the Control Unit and/or other components in
the drive line-up.
• Integration in system diagnostics
• An external 24 V DC power supply is required to operate liquid-cooled Motor Modules.

Motor Modules
WARNING
WARNING
interrupted
or serious injury.
conditions:
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
WARNING
smoke development and fire. This can also result in increased downtime and reduced
service lives for Motor Modules.
• Observe the cooling clearances above, below, and in front of the Power Modules which
CAUTION
Fire hazard due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded

Motor Modules
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
61800-5-1.
NOTICE

Motor Modules
7.3.1 Overview
Figure 7-1 Motor Module, frame size FXL

Motor Modules
Figure 7-2 Motor Module, frame size GXL

Motor Modules
Figure 7-3 Motor Module, frame size HXL

Motor Modules
Figure 7-4 Motor Module, frame size JXL

Motor Modules
7.3.2 Connection example
Figure 7-5 Connection example Motor Module

Motor Modules
7.3.3 DC link/motor connection
Table 7- 2 DC link/motor connection of the Motor Module
Terminals Technical data

DCP, DCN Voltage:
DC power input
• 510 ... 720 VDC
• 675 ... 1035 VDC
Connecting lugs: d = 13 mm (M12/50 Nm) for busbar connection
U2, V2, W2 Voltage:
3 AC power output
• 3 AC 0 V to 0.75 x DC link voltage 1)
Connecting lugs:
DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 2)
PE connection Connecting lugs:
DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 2)
1) For pure space vector modulation, a factor of approximately 0.70 … 0.72 applies.
For edge modulation, a factor of approximately 0.74 … 0.75.
2) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "cable lugs" in the appendix.

1 P24 V 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
1 P24 V Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 M
2 M
3 VL1 240 V AC: 8 A max.
4 VL2 24 V DC: max. 1 A
isolated
5 HS1 240 V AC: 8 A max.
6 HS2 24 V DC: max. 1 A
isolated
The pulse inhibit function is only available
when the "Safety Integrated Basic Functions
via onboard terminals" is enabled in the soft-
ware.

Motor Modules
Note
Function of the EP terminals
The function of the EP terminals for pulse inhibit is only available if the "Safety Integrated
Basic Functions via onboard terminals" software is enabled.
Note
7.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection

3 -Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130 /
4 +Temp PT100 / PT1000 / PTC
WARNING
isolation.
Module TM120.

Motor Modules
NOTICE
sensors
NOTICE
Note
1C130, PT100, PT1000 or PTC measuring sensor in the stator windings.
Note

Motor Modules

3 M
4
Note
7.3.7 X46 Brake control and monitoring
Table 7- 6 Terminal strip X46 brake control and monitoring

1 BR output + Brake connection
2 BR output - Supply voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current: 200 mA
3 FB input + Internal feedback signal from the Safe Brake
4 FB input - Adapter
Note
The interface is intended for connection of the Safe Brake Adapter.
WARNING
Fire due to overheating when the total length of the connecting cables is exceeded
Excessively long connection cables on terminal strip X46 can cause components to overheat
with the associated risk of fire and smoke.
• Limit the length of the connecting cables to a maximum of 10 m.
• The connection cable must not be led out the control cabinet or control cabinet group.

Motor Modules
7.3.8 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402


Note
Replacement seal
thickness 1.5 mm.

Motor Modules
7.3.10 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module
Table 7- 9 Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module

READY DC LINK
place.
place.
place.
Remark:
reconfigured.
Hz:
green/red
green/red
green/orange Note:
Table 7- 10 Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module

WARNING
injury.

Motor Modules
Dimension drawing, frame size FXL

Figure 7-6 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size FXL. Front view, side view

Motor Modules
Dimension drawing for frame size GXL

Figure 7-7 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size GXL. Front view, side view

Motor Modules
Dimension drawing, frame size HXL

Figure 7-8 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size HXL. Front view, side view

Motor Modules
Dimension drawing for frame size JXL

Figure 7-9 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size JXL, article numbers 6SL3325-1TE41-0AA3,
6SL3325-1TE41-4AA3, 6SL3325-1TG38-1AA3, 6SL3325-1TG41-0AA3,
6SL3325-1TG41-2AA3, 6SL3325-1TG41-3AA3. Front view, side view

Motor Modules
Figure 7-10 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size JXL, article numbers 6SL3325-1TE41-4AS3,
6SL3325-1TG41-6AA3, 6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3. Front view, side view

Motor Modules
7.5 Installation
7.5 Installation
Protection guard
A protection guard is mounted on the bottom of the Motor Module ("1" in the diagram
below) for use during transportation. The Motor Module can be rested on this protection
guard while it is removed from the packaging and during transportation.
CAUTION
over.

Motor Modules
7.5 Installation
Note
The mounting equipment for the power units can be used to mount the Motor Module, see
Crane lifting lugs

Motor Modules are fitted with crane lifting lugs as standard when shipped. The units can be
hoisted using these lugs and transported from the pallet to the installation location.
Note
It is not permissible to screw the crane lifting lug into the thread at the lower side of the
Motor Module.

Motor Modules
7.5 Installation
NOTICE

Since the Motor Modules are housed in a very slim enclosure, they need to be mechanically
supported against lateral movement and vibration if they are installed in a control cabinet.
Screw coupling points are provided at the top and bottom of the units for this purpose.
WARNING
distances)

Motor Modules
7.6.1 Motor Modules 510 V ... 720 V DC (line voltage, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V)
Table 7- 11 Technical data for Motor Modules, 510 ... 720 V DC (line voltage 380 ... 480 V3 AC), Part 1
Article number 6SL3325– 1TE32-1AA3 1TE32–6AA3 1TE33-1AA3 1TE35–0AA3

Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 110 132 160 250
- Based on IH (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 90 110 132 200
- Based on IL (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 150 200 250 400
- Based on IH (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 150 200 200 350
Output current
DC link current
- Rated current IN DC when fed via
- Basic Line Module A 256 317 380 600
- Active Line Module A 230 287 340 538
- Base load current IL DC when fed via
- Base load current IH DC when fed via
Supply voltages
- DC link voltage VDC 510 ... 720
- Output voltage VACrms 0 to 0.75 x DC link voltage
DC link capacitance μF 4800 5800 8400 9600
Rated pulse frequency kHz 2 2 2 2
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 2 2 2 2
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 8 8 8 8
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 1.61 1.95 2.29 3.56
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 1.68 2.06 2.38 3.74
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 52 52 52 52
DC link/motor connection Flat connection for M12 screw
Max. conductor cross-sections
- DC link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TE32-1AA3 1TE32–6AA3 1TE33-1AA3 1TE35–0AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 150 150 150 150
- Height mm 746 746 1172 1172
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545
Frame size FXL FXL GXL GXL
Weight kg 41 41 80 80
Recommended fuse acc. to IEC 3NE3230-0B 3NE3232-0B 3NE3233 3NE3336
- Rated current A 315 400 450 630
Recommended fuse acc. to UL 5)
Type 3NE3 3NE3230-0B 3NE3232-0B 3NE3233 3NE3336
- Rated current A 315 400 450 630
Type 3NB1/3NB2 3NB1231- 3NB1234- 3NB1337- 3NB1345-
4KK11 4KK11 4KK11 4KK11
- rated current A 315 400 500 800
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 400 V 3AC 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 460 V 3AC 60Hz.
3) The specified power loss is the maximum value for a 100% utilization level. The value in normal operation is lower.
ties".

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TE36-1AA3 1TE37-5AA3 1TE38–4AA3 1TE41-0AA3

Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 315 400 450 560
- Based on IH (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 250 315 400 450
- Based on IL (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 500 600 700 800
- Based on IH (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 350 450 600 700
Output current
DC link current
Supply voltages
Rated pulse frequency kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 7.5 7.5 7.5 8
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 4.81 5.1 5.75 7.9
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 5.25 5.61 6.33 8.55
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 54 54 54 56
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 4 x 185 4 x 185 4 x 185 Busbar
Dimensions
- Width mm 265 265 265 295
- Height mm 1002 1002 1002 1516
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545
Frame size HXL HXL HXL JXL
Weight kg 110 110 110 220

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TE36-1AA3 1TE37-5AA3 1TE38–4AA3 1TE41-0AA3

Recommended fuse acc. to IEC 3NE3338-8 3NE3334-0B 3NE3335 3NE3336
- Rated current A 800 500 560 630
Type 3NE3 3NE3338-8 -- 3NE3335 3NE3336
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 2 6) 2 6)
4KK16 4KK16 4KK16 4KK16
- rated current A 800 1000 1000 1400
ties".

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TE41–2AA3 1TE41–4AA3 1TE41–4AS3 7)

Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 710 800 800
- Based on IH (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 630 710 630
- Based on IL (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 1000 1150 1000
- Based on IH (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 900 1000 900
Output current
- Rated current IN A A 1260 1405 1330
- Base load current IL A 1230 1370 1310
- Base load current IH A 1127 1257 1150
- Max. output current Imax A A 1845 2055 2055
DC link current
- Basic Line Module A 1512 1714 1550
- Active Line Module A 1361 1544 1403
Supply voltages
DC link capacitance μF 29000 29000 21000
Rated pulse frequency kHz 1.25 1.25 2
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 1.25 1.25 2
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 8 8 4
Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 1.46 1.46 1.46
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 9.15 10.2 10.9
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 10.05 11.2 12.3
- Dissipated to the ambient air kW 0.56 0.62 0.65
Rated flow rate l/min 27 27 27
Pressure drop, typical Pa 70000 70000 70000
Liquid volume of integrated heat exchanger dm³ 1.56 1.56 1.56
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 56 56 56
- DC link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar
- PE connection mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar
Dimensions
- Width mm 295 295 295
- Height mm 1516 1516 1516
- Depth mm 545 545 545
Frame size JXL JXL JXL
Weight kg 220 220 230

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TE41–2AA3 1TE41–4AA3 1TE41–4AS3 7)

Recommended fuse acc. to IEC 3NE3340-8 3NE3340-8 3NE3340-8
Type 3NE3 -- 3NE3340-8 --
Type 3NB1/3NB2 3NB2364- 3NB2364- 3NB2364-
4KK17 4KK17 4KK17
- rated current A 2100 2100 2100
ties".
7) This Motor Module has been specifically designed for loads demanding a high dynamic performance.

Motor Modules
7.6.2 Motor Modules 675 V ... 1035 V DC (line voltage, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V)
Table 7- 14 Technical data for Motor Modules, DC 675 ... 1035 V (line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V), Part 1
Article number 6SL3325– 1TG31-0AA3 1TG31–5AA3 1TG32-2AA3 1TG33–3AA3

Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 90 132 200 315
- Based on IH (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 75 110 160 250
- Based on IL (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 55 90 132 200
- Based on IH (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 55 90 132 200
- Based on IL (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 75 150 200 300
- Based on IH (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 75 125 200 250
Output current
DC link current
Supply voltages
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 1 1 1.5 1.5
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 1.15 1.64 2.34 3.38
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 1.02 1.45 2.05 2.96
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 52 52 52 52

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TG31-0AA3 1TG31–5AA3 1TG32-2AA3 1TG33–3AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 150 150 150 150
- Height mm 728 728 1172 1172
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545
Frame size FXL FXL GXL GXL
Weight kg 41 41 80 80
Recommended fuse acc. to IEC 3NE3224 3NE3225 3NE3230-0B 3NE3233
- Rated current A 160 200 315 450
Type 3NE3 3NE3224 3NE3225 3NE3230-0B 3NE3233
- Rated current A 160 200 315 450
4KK11 4KK11 4KK11 4KK11
- rated current A 200 250 315 500
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 500 or 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 575 V 3 AC 60 Hz.
ties".

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TG34-7AA3 1TG35-8AA3 1TG37-4AA3 1TG38–0AA3 7)

Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 450 560 710 800
- Based on IH (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 400 450 630 710
- Based on IL (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 315 400 500 560
- Based on IH (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 250 315 450 500
- Based on IL (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 450 600 700 800
- Based on IH (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 450 500 700 700
Output current
DC link current
Supply voltages
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 5.44 5.61 7.65 8.47
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 5.1 4.89 6.67 7.39
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 54 54 54 54
Dimensions
- Width mm 265 265 265 265
- Height mm 1002 1002 1002 1002
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TG34-7AA3 1TG35-8AA3 1TG37-4AA3 1TG38–0AA3 7)

Frame size HXL HXL HXL HXL
Weight kg 110 110 110 110
Recommended fuse acc. to IEC 3NE3336 3NE3232-0B 3NE3335 3NE3335
- Rated current A 630 400 560 560
Type 3NE3 -- 3NE3232-0B -- --
4KK11 4KK16 4KK16 4KK16
- rated current A 800 800 1000 1000
ties".
7) Device 6SL3325-1TG38-0AA3 is optimized for a base pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz, for an increased pulse frequency, the
derating factor is higher than for the device with article number 6SL3325-1TG38-1AA3.

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TG38–1AA3 1TG41–0AA3 1TG41–3AA3 1TG41-6AA3

Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 800 1000 1200 1500
- Based on IH (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 710 900 1000 1260
- Based on IL (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 560 710 900 1000
- Based on IH (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 560 630 800 900
- Based on IL (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 800 1000 1250 1500
- Based on IH (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 700 900 1000 1250
Output current
DC link current
Supply voltages
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 9.56 10.87 13.49 17.9
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 8.34 9.55 11.84 15.7
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 56 56 56 56
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
- PE connection mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
Dimensions
- Width mm 295 295 295 295
- Height mm 1516 1516 1516 1516
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TG38–1AA3 1TG41–0AA3 1TG41–3AA3 1TG41-6AA3

Frame size JXL JXL JXL JXL
Weight kg 220 220 220 230
Recommended fuse acc. to IEC 3NE3335 3NE3337-8 3NE3340-8 3NE3337-8
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 2 6) 2 6) 2 6) 3 6)
- Rated current A 560 710 900 710
Type 3NE3 3NE3335 3NE3337-8 3NE3340-8 --
4KK16 4KK16 4KK17 4KK17
- rated current A 1000 1600 2100 2400
ties".

Motor Modules
Table 7- 17 Technical data for Motor Modules, 675 ... 1035 V DC (line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V), Part 4
Article number 6SL3325– 1TG41-6AP3 7)

Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 1500
- Based on IH (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 1260
- Based on IL (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 1000
- Based on IH (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 900
- Based on IL (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 1500
- Based on IH (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 1250
Output current
- Rated current IN A A 1560
- Base load current IL A 1500
- Base load current IH A 1370
- Max. output current Imax A A 2250
DC link current
- Basic Line Module A 1903
- Active Line Module A 1714
Supply voltages
DC link capacitance µF 21000
Rated pulse frequency kHz 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 7.5
Electronics current consumption (24 V DC) A 1.46
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 17.9
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 15.7
- Dissipated to the ambient air kW 0.78
Rated flow rate l/min 27
Pressure drop, typical Pa 70000
Liquid volume of integrated heat exchanger dm³ 1.56
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 56
- DC link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² Busbar
- PE connection mm² Busbar
Dimensions
- Width mm 295
- Height mm 1516
- Depth mm 545

Motor Modules
Article number 6SL3325– 1TG41-6AP3 7)

Frame size JXL
Weight kg 230
Recommended fuse acc. to IEC 3NE3337-8
Type 3NE3 --
- Number per phase (connected in parallel)
- Rated current A
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269
Type 3NB1/3NB2 3NB2366-
4KK17
- rated current A 2400
ties".
7) Additional duty cycle for output frequencies from 5 Hz to 10 Hz: Base load current = 1460 A, short-time current = 2340 A
for 5 s with a duty cycle duration of 600 s. For output frequencies from 1 Hz to 5 Hz, the short-time current is 1900 A for
5 s.

Motor Modules
7.6.3 Overload capability

The Motor Modules have an overload reserve (e.g. to overcome breakaway torques).
In the case of drives with overload requirements, the appropriate base-load current must,
therefore, be used as a basis for the required load.
The criterion for overload is that the Motor Module is operated as a maximum with its base
load current before and after the overload occurs (a load duration of 300 s is used as a basis
here).
Another precondition is that the Motor Module is operated at its factory-set pulse frequency
at output frequencies > 10 Hz.
Additional information on the overload capability is provided in the Low Voltage
Configuration Manual and in the SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions.
Low overload
The base load current for low overload (IL) is based on a load duty cycle of 110% for 60 s or
150% for 10 s.
Figure 7-13 Low overload

Motor Modules
High overload
The base load current for a high overload IHis based on a duty cycle of 150 % for 60 s or
160 % for 10 s.
High overload for Motor Module 6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3

This Motor Module is particularly suitable for high breakaway torques with applications such
as drilling, mixers, centrifuges and test bays. In this case, an additional duty cycle applies for
output frequencies from 5 Hz to 10 Hz. At output frequencies of 1 Hz to 5 Hz, the short-time
current is 1900 A for 5 s.
Figure 7-15 High overload for Motor Module 6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3

Motor Modules
7.6.4 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency

When the pulse frequency is increased, the derating factor of the output current must be
taken into account. This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified beforehand
in the technical data.
Table 7- 18 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for devices with a rated pulse fre-
quency of 2 kHz
at 2 kHz
6SL3325-... [kW] [A] 2.5 kHz 4 kHz 5 kHz 7.5 kHz 8 kHz
Connection voltage DC 510 ... 720 V (line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V)
1TE32-1AA3 110 210 95% 82% 74% 54% 50%
1TE32-6AA3 132 260 95% 83% 74% 54% 50%
1TE33-1AA3 160 310 97% 88% 78% 54% 50%
1TE35-0AA3 250 490 94% 78% 71% 53% 50%
1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 88 % 55 % -- -- --
Table 7- 19 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for units with a rated pulse frequency
of 1.25 kHz
at 1.25 kHz
6SL3325-... [kW] [A] 2 kHz 2.5 kHz 4 kHz 5 kHz 7.5 kHz 8 kHz
1TE36-1AA3 315 605 83% 72% 64% 60% 40% 36%
1TE37-5AA3 400 745 87 % 79 % 64% 55 % 40% 37%
1TE38-4AA3 450 840 87% 79% 64% 60% 40% 37%
1TE41-0AA3 560 985 92% 87% 70% 60% 50% 47 %
1TE41-2AA3 710 1260 97 % 95 % 74 % 60 % 50% 47 %
1TE41-4AA3 800 1405 97% 95% 74% 60 % 50% 47 %
1TG31-0AA3 90 100 92% 88% 71% 60% 40% --
1TG31-5AA3 132 150 90% 84% 66% 55% 35% --
1TG32-2AA3 200 215 92% 87% 70% 60% 40% --
1TG33-3AA3 315 330 89% 82% 65% 55% 40% --
1TG34-7AA3 450 465 92% 87% 67% 55% 35% --
1TG35-8AA3 560 575 91% 85% 64% 50% 35% --
1TG37-4AA3 710 735 84 % 74 % 53 % 40 % 25 % --
1TG38-0AA3 800 1) 810 83% 72% 49% 35% 25% --
1TG38-1AA3 800 810 97% 95% 71% 55% 35% --
1TG41-0AA3 1000 1025 91% 86% 64% 50% 30% --
1TG41-3AA3 1200 1270 87% 79% 55% 40% 25% --
1TG41-6AA3 1500 1560 87% 79% 55% 40% 25% --
1TG41-6AP3 1500 1560 87 % 79 % 55 % 40 % 25% --
1) Device 6SL3325-1TG38-0AA3 is optimized for a base pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz, for an increased pulse frequency, the
derating factor is higher than for the device with article number 6SL3325-1TG38-1AA3.

Motor Modules
Note
Derating factors for pulse frequencies in the range between fixed values
For pulse frequencies in the range between the specified fixed values, the relevant derating
factors can be determined by linear interpolation.
Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency

The adjustable pulse frequencies - and therefore the output frequencies that can be achieved
with the factory-set current controller clock cycles - are listed below.
Table 7- 20 Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency
Current controller Adjustable pulse Maximum achievable output frequency fA

clock cycle frequencies
V/f operating mode Vector operating Servo mode
TI fp
mode
250 µs 1) 2 kHz 166 Hz 166 Hz 333 Hz
4 kHz 333 Hz 333 Hz 550 Hz 3)
8 kHz 550 Hz 3) 480 Hz 550 Hz 3)
400 µs 2) 1.25 kHz 104 Hz 104 Hz -
2.50 kHz 208 Hz 208 Hz -
5.00 kHz 416 Hz 300 Hz -
7.50 kHz 550 Hz 3) 300 Hz -
1) As factory setting, the following devices have a current controller clock cycle of 250 µs - and a pulse frequency of 2 kHz:
- 510 ... 720 V DC: ≤250 kW / 490 A, 6SL3325-1TE41-4AS3
2) As factory setting, the following devices have a current controller clock cycle of 400 µs - and a pulse frequency of
1.25 kHz:
- 510 ... 720 V DC: ≥315 kW / 605 A, with the exception of 6SL3325-1TE41-4AS3
- 675 ... 1035 V DC: All power ratings
3) With the "High output frequencies" license, which can be ordered as option J01 on the CompactFlash card for SINAMICS
S120, the maximum output frequency is increased up to 650 Hz.
Refer to the Low Voltage Configuration Manual for current controller clock cycles deviating
from the factory setting.

Motor Modules
7.6.5 Parallel connection of Motor Modules

The following rules must be observed when connecting Motor Modules in parallel:
• Up to four identical Motor Modules (the same Article No.) can be connected in parallel.
• The motor supply cables must be the same length (symmetrical design).
• Power must be supplied to the Motor Modules from a common DC link.
• For motors with a single winding system, supply cables with a minimum length or motor
reactors must be used. The cable lengths are listed in the following tables.
• For motors with multi-winding systems, carefully observe the notes provided in the Low
Voltage Configuration Manual.
• A derating factor of 5% must be taken into consideration, regardless of the number of
Motor Modules connected in parallel.
Note
Operating power units (mixed operation) with Article number 6SL3325-1TG41-6AA3 and
6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3 is not possible.
Minimum cable lengths for parallel connection and connection to a motor with a single-winding
system
Note
Minimum cable lengths
The minimum cable lengths specified in the tables below must be observed when two or
more Motor Modules are connected in parallel and there is a connection to a motor with a
single-winding system. If the cable length required for the application cannot be achieved, a
motor reactor must be provided.

Motor Modules
Table 7- 21 Motor Modules, DC 510 ... 720 V (line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V)
Article number Type rating Output current Minimum cable length

[kW] [A] [m]
6SL3325-1TE32-1AA3 110 210 30
6SL3325-1TE32-6AA3 132 260 27
6SL3325-1TE33-1AA3 160 310 20
6SL3325-1TE35-0AA3 250 490 15
6SL3325-1TE36-1AA3 315 605 13
6SL3325-1TE37-5AA3 400 745 10
6SL3325-1TE38-4AA3 450 840 9
6SL3325-1TE41-0AA3 560 985 8
6SL3325-1TE41-2AA3 710 1260 8
6SL3325-1TE41-4AA3 800 1405 5
6SL3325-1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 5
Table 7- 22 Motor Modules, DC 675 ... 1035 V (line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V)
Article number Type rating Output current Minimum cable length

[kW] [A] [m]
6SL3325-1TG31-0AA3 90 100 90
6SL3325-1TG31-5AA3 132 150 70
6SL3325-1TG32-2AA3 200 215 50
6SL3325-1TG33-3AA3 315 330 30
6SL3325-1TG34-7AA3 450 465 25
6SL3325-1TG35-8AA3 560 575 20
6SL3325-1TG37-4AA3 710 735 18
6SL3325-1TG38-0AA3 800 810 18
6SL3325-1TG38-1AA3 800 810 15
6SL3325-1TG41-0AA3 1000 1025 10
6SL3325-1TG41-3AA3 1200 1270 8
6SL3325-1TG41-6AA3 1500 1560 7
6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3 1500 1560 7

Motor Modules

Motor-side power components 8
8.1 Sine-wave filter
8.1.1 Description
If a sine-wave filter is connected to the output of the Power Modules or Motor Modules, the
voltage between the motor terminals is virtually sinusoidal. This reduces the voltage load on
the motor windings and prevents motor noise induced by the pulse frequency.
Sine-wave filters are available up to a converter type power rating of 250 kW (without
consideration for derating).
The pulse frequency of the Power Modules or Motor Modules must be set to 4 kHz for the
sine-wave filters. As a consequence, the output current of the Power Module or Motor
Module decreases.
When commissioning the drive, sine-wave filters must be activated using parameter
p0230 = 3 so that the required parameter changes in conjunction with the sine-wave filter
are automatically set (e.g. a pulse frequency of 4 kHz).
When a sine-wave filter is used, the available output voltage decreases by 15%.
Figure 8-1 Sine-wave filter

Motor-side power components
WARNING
WARNING
Fire due to overheating because of inadequate ventilation clearances
smoke development and fire. Furthermore, an increased number of failures and shorter
service life of the components can occur.
• Maintain 100 mm ventilation clearances above and to the side of the component.
CAUTION
Risk of burns resulting from high surface temperature of the sine-wave filter
The surface temperature of the sine-wave filters can exceed 80 °C. You can get seriously
burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the sine-wave filter so that it cannot be touched. If this is not possible, attach a
clearly visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.
NOTICE
Sine-wave filter damage due to interchanged connections
Interchanging the input and output connections will damage the sine-wave filter.
• Connect the incoming cable from the Power Modules or Motor Modules to 1U1, 1V1,
1W1.
• Connect the outgoing cable to the load at 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.
NOTICE
Damage to the Power Module or Motor Module by using components that have not
been released
When using components that have not been released, damage or malfunctions can occur at
the devices or the system itself.
• Only use sine-wave filters that SIEMENS has released for SINAMICS.

NOTICE
Risk of damaging sine-wave filter by exceeding the maximum output frequency
The maximum permissible output frequency when sine-wave filters are used is 150 Hz. The
sine-wave filter can be damaged if the output frequency is exceeded.
• Operate the sine-wave filter with a maximum output frequency of 150 Hz.
NOTICE
Damage to the sine-wave filter if it is not activated during commissioning
The sine-wave filter may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the sine-wave filter during commissioning via parameter p0230 = 3.
NOTICE
Damage to the sine-wave filter if a motor is not connected
Sine-wave filters, which are operated without a motor being connected, can be damaged or
destroyed.
• Never operate a sine-wave filter on the Power Module or Motor Module without a
connected motor.
Note
Cable lengths
Keep the connecting cables to the Power Module or Motor Module as short as possible (max.
5 m).

Figure 8-2 Dimension drawing, sine-wave filter

Table 8- 1 Dimensions of the sine-wave filter (all values in mm)
6SL3000- 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-8AA0 2CE34-1AA0

B 620 620 620
H 300 300 370
T 320 320 360
I1 140 140 140
h1 180 180 220
h2 65 65 65
n1 1) 280 280 320
n2 1) 150 150 150
n3 1) 225 225 225
n4 105 105 105
d1 12 12 12
d2 11 11 11
d3 22 22 22
1) The lengths n1, n2 and n3 correspond to the drill hole spacing
Table 8- 2 Technical data of sine-wave filters 380 V ... 480 V 3 AC
Article number 6SL3000- 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-8AA0 2CE34-1AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TE32-1AA3 1TE32-6AA3 1TE33-1AA3 1TE35-0AA3
Rated current (unit rating) of the 170 A (90 kW) 215 A (110 kW) 270 A (132 kW) 380 A (200 kW)
Power Modules or Motor Modules
with sine-wave filter
at pulse frequency of 4 kHz
Rated current A 225 225 276 408
Maximum output frequency Hz 150 150 150 150
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.35 0.35 0.4 0.38
- At 150 Hz kW 0.6 0.6 0.69 0.7
Connections
- to the Power Module or Motor
Module M10 connecting lugs
- load M10 connecting lugs
Max. permissible cable length m 300 (shielded)
between sine-wave filter and 450 (unshielded)
motor
Dimensions
Width mm 620 620 620 620
Height mm 300 300 300 370
Depth mm 320 320 320 360
Weight kg 124 124 127 198

8.2 Motor reactors
8.2 Motor reactors
8.2.1 Description
Motor reactors reduce the voltage stress on the motor windings by reducing the voltage
gradients at the motor terminals that occur when motors are fed from drive converters. At
the same time, the capacitive re-charging currents that additionally load the output of the
Power Modules or Motor Modules when longer motor cables are used are simultaneously
reduced.
Table 8- 3 Max. pulse frequency when using a motor reactor for Power Modules and/or Motor Mod-
ules with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz
Article No. of the Power Type rating Output current for a Maximum pulse frequency
Module or Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of 2 kHz when using a motor reac-
[A] tor
6SL3315-1TE32-1AA3 110 210 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE32-1AA3
6SL3315-1TE32-6AA3 132 260 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE32-6AA3
6SL3315-1TE33-1AA3 160 310 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE33-1AA3
6SL3315-1TE35-0AA3 250 490 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE35-0AA3
6SL3325-1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 4 kHz
Table 8- 4 Max. pulse frequency when using a motor reactor for Power Modules and/or Motor Mod-
ules with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz
Article No. of the Power Type rating Output current for a Maximum pulse frequen-
Module or Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of 1.25 cy when using a motor
kHz [A] reactor
6SL3325-1TE36-1AA3 315 605 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE38-4AA3 450 840 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-0AA3 560 985 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-2AA3 710 1260 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-4AA3 800 1405 2.5 kHz

8.2 Motor reactors
Article No. of the Power Type rating Output current for a Maximum pulse frequen-
Module or Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of 1.25 cy when using a motor
kHz [A] reactor
6SL3325-1TG31-0AA3 90 100 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG31-5AA3 132 150 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG32-2AA3 200 215 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG33-3AA3 315 330 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG34-7AA3 450 465 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG35-8AA3 560 575 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG37-4AA3 710 735 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG38-0AA3 800 810 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG38-1AA3 800 810 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG41-0AA3 1000 1025 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG41-3AA3 1200 1270 2.5 kHz
WARNING
WARNING
Fire through overheating due to insufficient ventilation clearances
• Maintain 100 mm ventilation clearances above and to the side of the component.
CAUTION
Risk of burns resulting from high surface temperature of the motor reactor
The surface temperature of the motor reactors can exceed 80 °C. You can get seriously
burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the motor reactor so that it cannot be touched. If this is not possible, attach a

8.2 Motor reactors
NOTICE
Damage to the Power Module or Motor Module by using components that have not
been released
• Only use motor reactors that SIEMENS has released for SINAMICS.
NOTICE
Risk of damaging the motor reactor by exceeding the maximum output frequency
The maximum permissible output frequency when a motor reactor is used is 150 Hz. The
motor reactor can be damaged if the output frequency is exceeded.
• Operate the motor reactor with a maximum output frequency of 150 Hz.
NOTICE
Damage to the motor reactor if the maximum pulse frequency is exceeded
The maximum permissible pulse frequency when a motor reactor is used is 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz.
The motor reactor can be damaged if the pulse frequency is exceeded.
• When using the motor reactor, operate the Power Module or Motor Module with a
maximum pulse frequency of 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz.
NOTICE
Damage to the motor reactor if it is not activated during commissioning
The motor reactor may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the motor reactor during commissioning via parameter p0230 = 1.
Note
Cable lengths
5 m).

8.2 Motor reactors
Figure 8-3 Dimension drawing, motor reactor

8.2 Motor reactors
Table 8- 5 Dimensions of motor reactors, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 1 (all specifications in mm)
6SL3000- 2BE32-1AA0 2BE32-6AA0 2BE33-2AA0 2BE35-0AA0

Connection type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 2
a2 25 25 25 30
a3 5 5 5 6
a4 12.5 12.5 12.5 15
a5 11 11 11 14
I4 300 300 300 300
I5 100 100 100 100
h1 - - - -
h2 194 227 194 245
h3 60 60 60 60
h4 285 315 285 365
n1 1) 163 183 163 183
n2 1) 224 224 224 224
n3 257 277 257 277
n4 79 79 79 79
d3 M8 M8 M8 M8
6SL3000- 2AE36-1AA0 2AE38-4AA0 2AE41-0AA0 2AE41-4AA0

a2 40 40 40 60
a3 8 8 8 11
a4 20 20 20 17
a5 14 14 14 14
a6 - - - 22
a7 - - - 19
I4 410 410 410 460
I5 140 140 140 160
h1 392 392 392 392
h2 252 252 252 255
h3 120 120 120 120
h4 385 385 385 385
n1 1) 191 191 206 212
n2 1) 316 316 316 356
n3 292 292 302 326
n4 84.5 84.5 79.5 94.5
n5 30 30 - -
d3 M10 M10 M10 M10

8.2 Motor reactors
6SL3000- 2AH31-0AA0 2AH31-5AA0 2AH32-4AA0 2AH33-6AA0

a2 25 25 25 25
a3 5 5 5 5
a4 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
a5 11 11 11 11
I4 270 270 300 300
I5 88 88 100 100
h1 - - - -
h2 150 150 194 194
h3 60 60 60 60
h4 248 248 285 285
n1 1) 103 103 118 118
n2 1) 200 200 224 224
n3 200 200 212 212
n4 82 82 79 79
n5 - - - -
d3 M8 M8 M8 M8
6SL3000- 2AH34-7AA0 2AH35-8AA0 2AH38-1AA0 2AH41-1AA0 2AH41-3AA0

Connection type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
a2 40 40 40 50 60
a3 8 8 8 8 12
a4 20 20 20 14 17
a5 14 14 14 14 14
a6 - - - 22 22
a7 - - - - 19
I4 410 410 410 410 460
I5 140 140 140 140 160
h1 392 392 392 392 392
h2 252 252 252 258 255
h3 120 120 120 120 120
h4 385 385 385 385 385
n1 1) 141 141 183 206 182
n2 1) 316 316 316 316 356
n3 292 292 279 317 296
n4 134.5 134.5 79.5 94.5 94.5
n5 30 30 - - -
d3 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10

8.2 Motor reactors
Table 8- 9 Technical data of motor reactors 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 1
Article number 6SL3000- 2BE32-1AA0 2BE32-6AA0 2BE33-2AA0 2BE35-0AA0

Type rating of Power Module or Mo- kW 110 132 160 250
tor Module
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.436 0.454 0.422 0.448
- At 150 Hz kW 0.486 0.5 0.47 0.5
Connections
- To the Power Module or Motor
Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M10 M10 M10 M12
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M10 M10 M10 M12
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Max. permissible cable length be-
tween the motor reactor and motor
- without motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- for 1 motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- for 2 motor reactors in series m 525 (shielded) / 787 (unshielded)
Dimensions
Width mm 300 300 300 300
Height mm 285 315 285 365
Depth mm 257 277 257 277
Weight, approx. kg 66 66 66 100

8.2 Motor reactors
Article number 6SL3000- 2AE36-1AA0 2AE38-4AA0 2AE41-0AA0 2AE41-4AA0

1TE38-4AA3 1TE41-4AA3
1TE41-4AS3
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 315 400 / 450 560 710 / 800 / 800
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.798 0.834 0.939 0.946
- At 150 Hz kW 0.9 0.943 1.062 1.054
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M12 M12 M12 2 x M12
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M12 M12 M12 2 x M12
- PE M10 M10 M10 M10
Max. permissible cable length between
the motor reactor and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 410 410 410 460
Height mm 392 392 392 392
Depth mm 292 292 302 326
Article number 6SL3000- 2AH31-0AA0 2AH31-5AA0 2AH32-4AA0 2AH33-6AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TG31-0AA3 1TG31-5AA3 1TG32-2AA3 1TG33-3AA3
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 90 132 200 315
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.269 0.296 0.376 0.4
- At 150 Hz kW 0.3 0.332 0.425 0.454
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M10 M10 M10 M10
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Dimensions
Width mm 270 270 300 300
Height mm 248 248 285 285
Depth mm 200 200 212 212
Weight, approx. kg 25 25.8 34 46

8.2 Motor reactors
Article number 6SL3000- 2AH34-7AA0 2AH35-8AA0 2AH38-1AA0 2AH41-1AA0

1TG38-0AA3
1TG38-1AA3
Type rating of Power Module or Motor kW 450 560 710 1000
Module 800
800
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.631 0.705 0.877 0.927
- At 150 Hz kW 0.723 0.801 1.003 1.052
Connections
- To the Power Module or Motor Module M12 M12 M12 M12
(1U1, 1V1, 1W1)
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M12 M12 M12 M12
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Dimensions
Width mm 410 410 410 410
Height mm 392 392 392 392
Depth mm 292 292 279 317
Table 8- 13 Technical data of motor reactors, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 3
Article No. 6SL3000- 2AH41-3AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TG41-3AA3
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 1200
Rated current A 1270
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.862
- At 150 Hz kW 0.952
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M12
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M12
- PE M8
Dimensions
Width mm 460
Height mm 392
Depth mm 296
Weight, approx. kg 153

8.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter
8.3.1 Description
The dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter comprises two components: the dv/dt reactor and
the voltage-limiting network (voltage peak limiter), which cuts of the voltage peaks and
returns energy to the DC link. The dv/dt filters plus voltage peak limiter must be used for
motors for which the proof voltage of the insulation system is unknown or insufficient.
The dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter limit the rate of voltage rise dv/dt to values
< 500 V/µs and the typical voltage peaks ÛLL for rated line voltages to the following values
(for motor cable lengths of ≤ 150 m):
< 1000 V at Uline < 575 V
< 1250 V at 660 V < Uline < 690 V.
Components
The article numbers of the individual components (dv/dt reactor and Voltage Peak Limiter)
are listed in the following table:
Table 8- 14 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter, article numbers of the individual components
dv/dt filter plus voltage peak lim- dv/dt reactor Voltage peak limiter
iter
6SL3000-2DE32-6AA0 6SL3000-2DE32-6CA0 6SL3000-2DE32-6BA0
6SL3000-2DE41-4AA0 2 x 6SL3000-2DE41-4DA0 6SL3000-2DE41-4BA0
6SL3000-2DH31-0AA0 6SL3000-2DH31-0CA0 6SL3000-2DH31-0BA0
6SL3000-2DH38-1AA0 2 x 6SL3000-2DH38-1DA0 6SL3000-2DH38-1BA0
6SL3000-2DH41-3AA0 2 x 6SL3000-2DH41-3DA0 6SL3000-2DH41-3BA0

Table 8- 15 Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter is used with Power Modules and/or Motor Mod-
ules with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz
Article No. of the Power Type rating Output current for a Max. pulse frequency
Module or Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of 2 kHz when a dv/dt filter is used
[A]
6SL3315-1TE32-1AA3 110 210 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE32-1AA3
6SL3315-1TE32-6AA3 132 260 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE32-6AA3
6SL3315-1TE33-1AA3 160 310 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE33-1AA3
6SL3315-1TE35-0AA3 250 490 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE35-0AA3
6SL3325-1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 4 kHz
Table 8- 16 Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter is used with Power Modules and/or Motor Mod-
ules with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz
Module or Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of when a dv/dt filter is used
1.25 kHz [A]
6SL3325-1TE36-1AA3 315 605 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE38-4AA3 450 840 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-0AA3 560 985 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-2AA3 710 1260 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-4AA3 800 1405 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG31-0AA3 90 100 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG31-5AA3 132 150 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG32-2AA3 200 215 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG33-3AA3 315 330 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG34-7AA3 450 465 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG35-8AA3 560 575 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG37-4AA3 710 735 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG38-0AA3 800 810 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG38-1AA3 800 810 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG41-0AA3 1000 1025 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG41-3AA3 1200 1270 2.5 kHz

WARNING
WARNING
• Maintain 100 mm clearances above and below the components.
CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperature of the dv/dt reactor
The surface temperature of the du/dt reactors may exceed 80 °C. You can get seriously burnt
when touching the surface.
• Mount the dv/dt reactor so that it cannot be touched. If this is not possible, attach a
NOTICE
Damage to the voltage peak limiter due to interchanged connections
The voltage peak limiter will be damaged if the input and output connections are
interchanged.
• Connect the incoming cable from the DC link of the Power Module or Motor Module to
DCP, DCN.
• Connect the outgoing cable to the dv/dt reactor to 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter by using components that have not been released
• Only use dv/dt filters that SIEMENS has approved for operation with SINAMICS.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter by exceeding the maximum output frequency
The maximum permissible output frequency when using a du/dt filter is 150 Hz. The dv/dt
filter can be damaged if the output frequency is exceeded.
• Operate the du/dt filter with a maximum output frequency of 150 Hz.
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter by exceeding the maximum pulse frequency
The maximum permissible pulse frequency when using a du/dt filter is 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz. The
dv/dt filter can be damaged if the pulse frequency is exceeded.
• When using the du/dt filter, operate the Power Module or Motor Module with a
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter if it is not activated during commissioning
The dv/dt filter may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the du/dt filter during commissioning via parameter p0230 = 2.
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter if a motor is not connected
dv/dt filters which are operated without a motor being connected can be damaged or
destroyed.
• Never operate a dv/dt filter on the Power Module or Motor Module without a connected
motor.
Note
Cable lengths
5 m).

Figure 8-4 Interface overview, voltage peak limiter, type 1


8.3.4 Connecting the dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter
Figure 8-7 Connecting a dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter for versions with one dv/dt reactor
Figure 8-8 Connecting a dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter for versions with two dv/dt reactors

Cable cross-sections
Table 8- 17 Cable cross-sections for connections between the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter and
Power Module or Motor Module
dv/dt filter Connection to the DC link Connection between dv/dt reactor

plus (DCPS / DCNS) and voltage limiting network
voltage peak limiter [mm²] (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) [mm²]
6SL3000-2DE32-6AA0 35 10
6SL3000-2DE35-0AA0 70 16
6SL3000-2DE38-4AA0 2 x 50 50
6SL3000-2DE41-4AA0 2 x 120 120
6SL3000-2DH31-0AA0 16 6
6SL3000-2DH31-5AA0 16 6
6SL3000-2DH32-2AA0 70 16
6SL3000-2DH33-3AA0 70 16
6SL3000-2DH35-8AA0 120 35
6SL3000-2DH38-1AA0 2 x 70 70
6SL3000-2DH41-3AA0 2 x 120 120
WARNING
Inadequate installation of the cables to the Power Module or Motor Module DC link can
result in a ground fault / short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated
smoke and fire.
• Protect the cables from mechanical damage.
• In addition, apply one of the following measures:
– Route the cables in separate cable ducts or pipes.
Note
Maximum cable lengths
The connections should be kept as short as possible.
The maximum cable length for the specified connections is 5 m in each case.

8.3.5 Dimension drawing, dv/dt reactor
Figure 8-9 Dimension drawing, dV/dt reactor

Table 8- 18 Dimensions of dV/dt reactor, 380 V ... 480 V 3 AC (all dimensions in mm)
6SL3000- 2DE32-6CA0 2DE35-0CA0 2DE38-4CA0 2DE41-4CA0

a2 25 30 40 60
a3 5 6 8 10
a4 14 17 22 19
a5 10.5 x 14 14 x 18 14 x 18 14 x 18
a6 7 9 11 11
a7 - - - 17
a8 - - - 26
I4 410 460 460 445
I5 135 152.5 152.5 145
hmax 370 370 385 385
h2 258 240 280 250
h3 76 83 78 121
n1 1) 141 182 212 212
n2 1) 316 356 356 341
n3 229 275 312 312
n4 72 71 78 78
d3 M10 (12 x 18) M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22)
Table 8- 19 Dimensions of dV/dt reactor, 500 V ... 690 V, Part 1 (all values in mm)
6SL3000- 2DH31-0CA0 2DH31-5CA0 2DH32-2CA0 2DH33-3CA0

a2 25 25 25 25
a3 6 6 5 5
a4 14 14 14 14
a5 10.5 x 14 10.5 x 14 10.5 x 14 10.5 x 14
a6 7 7 7 9
a7 - - - -
a8 - - - -
I4 350 350 460 460
I5 120 120 152.5 152.5
hmax 320 320 360 360
h2 215 215 240 240
h3 70 70 86 86
n1 1) 138 138 155 212
n2 1) 264 264 356 356
n3 227 227 275 275
n4 74 74 101 42
d3 M8 M8 M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22)

Table 8- 20 Dimensions of dV/dt reactor, 500 V ... 690 V, Part 2 (all values in mm)
6SL3000- 2DH35-8CA0 2DH38-1DA0 2DH41-3DA0

a2 40 50 60
a3 8 8 10
a4 22 16 19
a5 14 x 18 14 x 18 14 x 18
a6 11 11 11
a7 - 14 17
a8 - 22 26
I4 460 445 445
I5 152.5 145 145
hmax 385 385 385
h2 280 255 250
h3 78 114 121
n1 1) 212 212 212
n2 1) 365 341 341
n3 312 312 312
n4 78 78 78
d3 M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22)

8.3.6 Dimension drawing of the voltage peak limiter
Figure 8-10 Dimension drawing of the voltage peak limiter, type 1


Table 8- 21 Assigning voltage peak limiter to dimension drawings
Voltage peak limiter Dimension drawing type

6SL3000-2DE32-6BA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DH31-0BA0 Type 1

Table 8- 22 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
Article number 6SL3000- 2DE32-6AA0 2DE35-0AA0 2DE38-4AA0 2DE41-4AA0 1)

Suitable for Power Module 6SL3315- 1TE32-1AA3 1TE33-1AA3 -- --
1TE32-6AA3 1TE35-0AA3
1TE32-6AA3 1TE35-0AA3 1TE37-5AA3 1TE41-2AA3
1TE38-4AA3 1TE41-4AA3
1TE41-4AS3
Type rating of Power Module kW 110 / 132 160 / 250 315 / 400 / 450 560 / 710 / 800 /
or Motor Module 800
Ithmax A 260 490 840 1405
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.701 0.874 1.106 1.111
- at 60 Hz kW 0.729 0.904 1.115 1.154
- at 150 Hz kW 0.78 0.963 1.226 1.23
Connections
- To the Power Module or
Motor Module M10 M12 M12 2 x M12
- Load M10 M12 M12 2 x M12
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable m 300 (shielded)
length between dv/dt reactor 450 (unshielded)
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 410 460 460 445
Height mm 370 370 385 385
Depth mm 229 275 312 312
Voltage peak limiter
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.029 0.042 0.077 0.134
- at 60 Hz kW 0.027 0.039 0.072 0.125
- at 150 Hz kW 0.025 0.036 0.066 0.114
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor M8 Terminal 70 mm² M8 M10
- DC M8 Terminal 70 mm² M8 M10
- PE M8 Terminal 35 mm² M8 M8
Dimensions
Width mm 263 392 309 309
Height mm 265 285 1312.5 1312.5
Depth mm 188 210 400 400
1) Two dv/dt reactors are required for these dv/dt filters. The technical data provided apply to one dv/dt reactor.
Note
Cable lengths for versions with two dv/dt reactors
For versions with two dv/dt reactors, the cable lengths specified in the table do not change.

Table 8- 23 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 1
Article number 6SL3000- 2DH31-0AA0 2DH31-5AA0 2DH32-2AA0 2DH33-3AA0

Type rating of the Motor kW 90 132 200 315
Module
Ithmax A 100 150 215 330
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.49 0.389 0.578 0.595
- at 60 Hz kW 0.508 0.408 0.604 0.62
- at 150 Hz kW 0.541 0.436 0.645 0.661
Connections
- To the Motor Module M10 M10 M10 M10
- Load M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 350 350 460 460
Height mm 320 320 360 360
Depth mm 227 227 275 275
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.016 0.020 0.032 0.042
- at 60 Hz kW 0.015 0.019 0.03 0.039
- at 150 Hz kW 0.013 0.018 0.027 0.036
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor M8 M8 Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm²
- DC M8 M8 Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm²
- PE M8 M8 Terminal 35 mm² Terminal 35 mm²
Dimensions
Width mm 263 263 392 392
Height mm 265 265 285 285
Depth mm 188 188 210 210

Table 8- 24 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 2
Article number 6SL3000- 2DH35-8AA0 2DH38-1AA0 1) 2DH41-3AA0 1)

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TG34-7AA3 1TG37-4AA3 1TG41-0AA3
1TG35-8AA3 1TG38-0AA3 1TG41-3AA3
1TG38-1AA3
Type rating of Power Module kW 450 / 560 710 / 800 / 800 1000 / 1200
or Motor Module
Ithmax A 575 810 1270
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.862 0.828 0.865
- at 60 Hz kW 0.902 0.867 0.904
- at 150 Hz kW 0.964 0.927 0.966
Connections
- To the Power Module or
Motor Module M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- Load M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- PE M6 M6 M6
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 460 445 445
Height mm 385 385 385
Depth mm 312 312 312
Weight, approx. kg 172 160 164
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.063 0.106 0.15
- at 60 Hz kW 0.059 0.1 0.14
- at 150 Hz kW 0.054 0.091 0.128
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor M8 M10 M10
- DC M8 M10 M10
- PE M8 M8 M8
Dimensions
Width mm 309 309 309
Height mm 1312.5 1312.5 1312.5
Depth mm 400 400 400
1) Two dv/dt reactors are required for these dv/dt filters. The technical data provided apply to one dv/dt reactor.
Note
Cable lengths for versions with two dv/dt reactors
For versions with two dv/dt reactors, the cable lengths specified in the table do not change.

8.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter
8.4.1 Description
The dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter comprises two components: the dv/dt
reactor and the voltage-limiting network (voltage peak limiter), which cuts off the voltage
peaks and feeds back the energy into the DC link. The dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak
limiter is designed for use with motors for which the voltage strength of the insulation
system is unknown or insufficient.
dv/dt filters compact plus Voltage Peak Limiters limit the voltage rate of rise dv/dt to values
< 1600 V/µs - and the typical voltage peaks to the following values according to limit value
curve A according to IEC 60034-25:2007:
• < 1150 V at Uline < 575 V
• < 1400 V at 660 V < Uline < 690 V.
Note
Setting range for pulse frequencies
It is permissible to set pulse frequencies in the range between the rated pulse frequency and
the relevant maximum pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter
is used.
Note
Current derating at increased pulse frequency
Current derating at an increased pulse frequency depends on the derating of the associated
Power Module or Motor Module.
Note
Components of the dv/dt filter
The dv/dt filters compact plus voltage peak limiter of Types 1 to 3 consist of one single
component. Type 4 consists of two separate components, the dv/dt reactor and the voltage
peak limiter.

Table 8- 25 Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter is used in
Power Modules or Motor Modules with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz
Module or Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of 2 kHz when a dv/dt filter com-
[A] pact plus voltage peak
limiter is used
6SL3315-1TE32-1AA3 110 210 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE32-1AA3
6SL3315-1TE32-6AA3 132 260 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE32-6AA3
6SL3315-1TE33-1AA3 160 310 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE33-1AA3
6SL3315-1TE35-0AA3 250 490 4 kHz
6SL3325-1TE35-0AA3
6SL3325-1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 4 kHz
Table 8- 26 Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter is used in
Power Modules or Motor Modules with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz
Module or Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of 1.25 when a dv/dt filter com-
kHz [A] pact plus voltage peak
limiter is used
6SL3325-1TE36-1AA3 315 605 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE38-4AA3 450 840 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-0AA3 560 985 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-2AA3 710 1260 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TE41-4AA3 800 1405 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG31-0AA3 90 100 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG31-5AA3 132 150 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG32-2AA3 200 215 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG33-3AA3 315 330 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG34-7AA3 450 465 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG35-8AA3 560 575 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG37-4AA3 710 735 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG38-0AA3 800 810 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG38-1AA3 800 810 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG41-0AA3 1000 1025 2.5 kHz
6SL3325-1TG41-3AA3 1200 1270 2.5 kHz

WARNING
WARNING
• Maintain 100 mm clearances above and below the components.
• Always mount the dv/dt filters compact plus voltage peak limiter in a vertical, upright
position, to enable cooling air to flow through the heat sink on the voltage peak limiter
from the bottom to the top.
CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperature of the dv/dt filter compact
The surface temperature of the du/dt filters compact may exceed 80 °C. You can get
seriously burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the dv/dt filters compact so that they cannot be touched. If this is not possible,
attach a clearly visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.
NOTICE
Damage to the voltage peak limiter due to interchanged connections
The Voltage Peak Limiter will be damaged if the input and output connections are
interchanged on devices with the article numbers 6SL3000-2DE41-4EA0, 6SL3000-2DG38-
1EA0, and 6SL3000-2DG41-3EA0.
• Connect the incoming cable from the DC link of the Motor Module to DCP, DCN.
• Connect the outgoing cable to the dv/dt reactor to 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact by using components that have not been released
• Only use a dv/dt filter compact that SIEMENS has approved for operation with SINAMICS.
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter by exceeding the maximum output frequency
The maximum permissible output frequency when a dv/dt filter compact is used is 150 Hz.
The dv/dt filter compact can be damaged if the output frequency is exceeded.
• Operate the du/dt filter compact with a maximum output frequency of 150 Hz.
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact during continuous operation with low output
frequencies
Uninterrupted duty at an output frequency less than 10 Hz can result in thermal overload
and destroy the du/dt filter.
• When using a du/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter do not operate the drive
continuously with an output frequency less than 10 Hz.
• You may operate the drive for a maximum load duration of 5 minutes at an output
frequency less than 10 Hz, provided that you then select operation with an output
frequency higher than 10 Hz for a period of 5 minutes.
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact by exceeding the maximum pulse frequency
The maximum permissible pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter compact is used is 2.5 kHz or
4 kHz. The dv/dt filter compact can be damaged if the pulse frequency is exceeded.
• When using the dv/dt filter compact, operate the Power Module or Motor Module with a
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact if it is not activated during commissioning
The dv/dt filter compact may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the du/dt filter compact during commissioning using parameter p0230 = 2.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact if a motor is not connected
dv/dt filters compact which are operated without a motor being connected can be damaged
or destroyed.
• Never operate a dv/dt filter compact on the Power Module or Motor Module without a
connected motor.
Note
Cable lengths
5 m). Use an equivalent cable type when replacing the cables supplied.
Figure 8-13 Interface overview for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, Type 1


Figure 8-16 Interface overview for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, Type 4 dv/dt reactor

Figure 8-17 Interface overview for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, Type 4 Voltage Peak
Limiter
8.4.4 Connecting the dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter
Figure 8-18 Connecting the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter - integrated unit

Figure 8-19 Connecting the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter - separate components
Cable cross-sections
In a dv/dt filter with separate voltage peak limiter (Type 4), the connections between dv/dt
reactor and voltage peak limiter are already installed on the voltage peak limiter.
Table 8- 27 Cable cross-sections for connections between a dv/dt filter and Motor Module
dv/dt filter compact plus Cross-section Connection on dv/dt filter

voltage peak limiter [mm²]
Type 1 16 Screw M8 / 12 Nm
Type 2 25 Screw M8 / 12 Nm
Type 3 50 Copper bar for M8 bolt / 12 Nm
Type 4 95 Copper bar for M8 bolt / 12 Nm
Table 8- 28 Connection cable enclosed for connecting dv/dt reactor and voltage peak limiter
Voltage peak limiter Cross-section Lug for connecting 1U2 / 1V2 / 1W2 on the dv/dt
[mm²] reactor
Type 4 70 M12
Cable type: 600 V, UL style 3271, operating temperature 125° C

WARNING
Inadequate installation of the cables to the Power Module or Motor Module DC link can
result in a ground fault / short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated
smoke and fire.
• Protect the cables from mechanical damage.
• In addition, apply one of the following measures:
– Route the cables in separate cable ducts or pipes.
Note
The connections should be kept as short as possible.
The maximum cable length between Power Modules or Motor Module and dv/dt filter
compact (motor cables and cables to the DC link) is 5 m.
An equivalent cable type must be used when replacing enclosed cables.
WARNING
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact through mechanical load on the connections
The connections at the dv/dt filter compact are not designed for direct mechanical
connection to the motor cables.
• Take measures on the plant or system side to ensure that the connections cannot be
deformed by the mechanical load exerted by the connected cables.

8.4.5 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter
dV/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 1
Figure 8-20 Dimension drawing for dV/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 1



Figure 8-23 Dimension drawing for dV/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 4 dV/dt reactor

Figure 8-24 Dimension drawing for dV/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 4 Voltage peak
limiter

Table 8- 29 Assignment of dV/dt filters compact plus voltage peak limiter to the dimension drawings
dV/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter Dimension drawing type
6SL3000-2DE32-6EA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DG31-0EA0 Type 1
Table 8- 30 Technical data of the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 1
Article number 6SL3000- 2DE32-6EA0 2DE35-0EA0 2DE38-4EA0

Suitable for Power Module 6SL3315- 1TE32-1AA3 (110 kW) 1TE33-1AA3 (160 kW) --
(unit rating) 1TE32-6AA3 (132 kW) 1TE35-0AA3 (250 kW)
Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TE32-1AA3 (110 kW) 1TE33-1AA3 (160 kW) 1TE36-1AA3 (315 kW)
(unit rating) 1TE32-6AA3 (132 kW) 1TE35-0AA3 (250 kW) 1TE37-5AA3 (400 kW)
1TE38-4AA3 (450 kW)
Ithmax A 260 490 840
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.210 0.290 0.518
- At 60 Hz kW 0.215 0.296 0.529
- At 150 Hz kW 0.255 0.344 0.609
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for M10 bolt for M10 bolt for M12 bolt
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 screw for M8 screw for M8 bolt
- PE M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
length between dv/dt filter 150 (unshielded)
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 310 350 440
Height mm 283 317 369
Depth mm 238 260 311

Article number 6SL3000- 2DE41-4EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TE41-0AA3 (560 kW)
(unit rating) 1TE41-2AA3 (710 kW)
1TE41-4AA3 (800 kW)
1TE41-4AS3 (800 kW)
Ithmax A 1405
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 1.154
- At 60 Hz kW 1.197
- At 150 Hz kW 1.444
and motor
dv/dt reactor
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for 2 x M12 bolts
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for 2 x M12 bolts
- PE M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 430
Height mm 385
Depth mm 323
Weight, approx. kg 168.8
Terminals
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 bolt
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for M8 bolt
- PE for M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 277
Height mm 360
Depth mm 291
Weight, approx. kg 19.2

Article number 6SL3000- 2DG31-0EA0 2DG31-5EA0 2DG32-2EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TG31-0AA3 (90 kW) 1TG31-5AA3 (132 kW) 1TG32-2AA3 (200 kW)
(unit rating)
Ithmax A 100 150 215
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.227 0.270 0.305
- At 60 Hz kW 0.236 0.279 0.316
- At 150 Hz kW 0.287 0.335 0.372
Terminals
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 screw for M8 screw for M8 screw
- PE M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 310 310 350
Height mm 283 283 317
Depth mm 238 238 260
Article number 6SL3000- 2DG33-3EA0 2DG35-8EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TG33-3AA3 (315 kW) 1TG34-7AA3 (450 kW)
(unit rating) 1TG35-8AA3 (560 kW)
Ithmax A 330 575
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.385 0.571
- At 60 Hz kW 0.399 0.586
- At 150 Hz kW 0.480 0.689
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for M10 bolt for M12 bolt
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 screw for M8 bolt
- PE M6 screw M6 screw
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 350 440
Height mm 317 369
Depth mm 260 311
Weight, approx. kg 60 100

Table 8- 34 Technical data of the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V 3, Part 3
Article number 6SL3000- 2DG38-1EA0 2DG41-3EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3325- 1TG37-4AA3 (710 kW) 1TG41-0AA3 (1000 kW)
(unit rating) 1TG38-0AA3 (800 kW) 1TG41-3AA3 (1200 kW)
1TG38-1AA3 (800 kW)
Ithmax A 810 1270
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.964 1.050
- At 60 Hz kW 0.998 1.104
- At 150 Hz kW 1.196 1.319
and motor
dv/dt reactor
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for 2 x M12 bolts for 2 x M12 bolts
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for 2 x M12 bolts for 2 x M12 bolts
- PE M6 screw M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 430 430
Height mm 385 385
Depth mm 323 323
Weight, approx. kg 171.2 175.8
Terminals
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 bolt for M8 bolt
- PE for M6 screw for M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 277 277
Height mm 360 360
Depth mm 291 291
Weight, approx. kg 18.8 19.2

Cabinet design and EMC 9
9.1 Notes
9.1.1 General
The modular concept of SINAMICS S120 chassis units allows a wide range of potential device
combinations. For this reason, it is impossible to describe each individual combination. This
section instead aims to provide some basic information and general rules on the basis of
which special device combinations can be configured to ensure electromagnetic compatibility
and adequate cooling – therefore ensuring reliable operation with the appropriate
functionality.
SINAMICS S120 components are designed for installation in the appropriate enclosures,
which can take the form of cabinet units or control boxes made of steel that provide
protection against shock and other environmental effects. They are also part of the EMC
concept.
WARNING
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.
WARNING
Injuring caused by foreign objects in the device
Parts and components falling into the device (e.g. drilling chips, end sleeves, etc.) can cause
short-circuits and damage to the insulation. This can lead to serious injuries (arcing, bangs,
pieces flying out of the equipment).
• Only perform installation and other work when the devices are current-free.
• Cover the ventilation slits during the installation of the cabinet and remove the cover
before switching on.

Cabinet design and EMC
9.1 Notes
NOTICE
Limiting of overvoltages
On systems with a grounded phase conductor and a line voltage >600 VAC, line-side
components should be installed to limit overvoltages to overvoltage category II according to
IEC 61800-5-1.
Note
Protection against the spread of fire
The converter may be operated only in closed housings or in higher-level control cabinets
with protective covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are used.
Converters of the Open Type/IP20 degree of protection must be installed in a metal control
cabinet or protected by another equivalent measure such that fire cannot spread and
emissions outside of the control cabinet are prevented.
Note
Protection against condensation and electrically conductive contamination
To ensure functional safety and safety functions of Safety Integrated, protect the converter,
e.g. by installing it in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 according to IEC 60529
or Type 12 according to NEMA 250. Further measures may be necessary for particularly
critical operating conditions.
A lower degree of cabinet protection is permissible, if condensation and conductive pollution
can be excluded at the installation site.
Table 9- 1 Maximum cable lengths
Type Maximum length [m]

24 VDC power cables 1) 10
24 V signal cables 1) 30
Power cable between the Motor Module and motor 300 (shielded)
450 (unshielded)
when using two motor reactors in series 525 (shielded)
787 (unshielded)
DRIVE-CLiQ cables
• inside the electrical cabinet, e.g. connection between the CU320 70
and the first Motor Module or between the Motor Modules
• DRIVE-CLiQ MOTION-CONNECT connecting cables for external 100
components
1) For longer lengths, suitable wiring must be provided by the user for overvoltage protection.

9.2 EMC-compliant design and control cabinet configuration
Table 9- 2 Recommendations for overvoltage protection
DC supply 24 V signal cables

Weidmüller Weidmüller
Type: PU DS 24 V Type no.: MCZ OVP TAZ 24 V
Order number: 8682100000 Order number: 8449160000
Weidmüller GmbH & Co. KG
9.1.3 Directives
The control cabinet must satisfy the following EC Directives in the European Economic Area
(EEA):
Table 9- 3 Directives
Directive Description
2014/35/EU Directive of the European Parliament and Council from February 26, 2014 on the approximation
of the laws relating to the provision of electrical equipment designed for use within certain volt-
age limits (Low-Voltage Directive)
2014/30/EU Directive of the European Parliament and Council of February 26, 2014 for the harmonization of
the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC directive)
2006/42/EC Directive of the European Parliament and Council of May 17, 2006 on machinery and for chang-
ing Directive 95/16/EC (amendment) (machinery directive)
9.2 EMC-compliant design and control cabinet configuration

Detailed configuration instructions regarding the EMC-compliant design of drives and control
cabinet configuration can be found in the "SINAMICS Low Voltage Configuration Manual", see
Configuration Manual for SINAMICS G130, G150, S120 Built-in Units, S120 Cabinet Modules,
S150 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/83180185).

9.3 Cabinet installation, vertical and horizontal installation
9.3.1 Vertical installation

The SINAMICS S120 liquid-cooled devices are suitable for vertical installation in a cabinet with
a minimum width of 400 mm.
A partition must be installed between the cabinets housing and the SINAMICS device to
ensure that the device is adequately ventilated.
Figure 9-1 Example showing a partition in the control cabinet

The dimensions for the installation heights of the partition are specified in the following
table.
Table 9- 4 Installation height of the partition from the lower side of the device (from the lower edge
of the device)
Type Installation height of the

partition [mm]
Power Module FL 140
Power Module GL 290
Basic Line Module FBL 480
Basic Line Module GBL 910
Active Line Module FXL, Motor Module FXL 150
Active Line Module GXL, Motor Module GXL 480
Active Line Module HXL, Motor Module HXL 340
Active Line Module JXL, Motor Module JXL 800
9.3.1.1 Mounting on mounting rails

The liquid-cooled SINAMICS S120 devices can be mounted in the control cabinet on
mounting rails. For this purpose, mounting rails are provided on the lower side of the power
units, which can be used to mount the device in the control cabinet.
The mounting rails are intended to simplify installing or removing the power unit (Active Line
Modules, Basic Line Modules, Motor Modules, Power Modules).
For this purpose, the mounting equipment for the power units can be attached to the
mounting rails (article number 6SL3766-1CA00-0AA0), in order to simplify mounting and
installation work, see "Mounting equipment for power units (Page 347)".
By suitably designing the mounting rails in the control cabinet, the mechanical load of the
power unit can be better distributed to the cabinet frame elements.
The mounting rails must be designed and manufactured on a system-for-system specific
basis.
Bolting points for the mounting rails

In order that the mounting equipment for the power units can be correctly attached to the
mounting rails, the mounting rails must be provided with the subsequently described bolting
points at the front.
Figure 9-2 Bolting points for the mounting rails (dimensions in mm)

Rail profile at the power units

The dimensions of the rail profiles for the various power units are shown in the following
drawings.
Figure 9-3 Rail profile, Power Modules, frame sizes FL, GL (dimensions in mm)
Figure 9-4 Rail profile, Basic Line Module, frame sizes FBL, GBL (dimensions in mm)

Figure 9-5 Rail profile, Motor Module, frame size FXL (dimensions in mm)
Figure 9-6 Rail profile, Active Line Module and Motor Module, frame size GXL, (dimensions in mm)

Figure 9-7 Rail profile, Active Line Module and Motor Module, frame size HXL (dimension data in mm)
Figure 9-8 Rail profile, Active Line Module and Motor Module, frame size JXL, (dimensions in mm)

9.3.1.2 Volumetric air flow and fans required
Note
Notes for installation in control cabinets
The SINAMICS S120 liquid-cooled devices have IP20 degree of protection with the exception
of the electrical connections (overall degree of protection IP00).
Depending on the degree of protection of the cabinet, it must be guaranteed that the
thermal losses in the cabinet are extracted from the cabinet using a fan or an air/water heat
exchanger.
the respective thermal losses can be found in the technical data of each individual device.
We recommend that a heat run is performed in order to be able to maintain the temperature
ranges specified in the technical data also when installed in a cabinet.
Note
Notes when mounting vertically
No additional measures need to be taken if the modules are mounted in a cabinet with
degree of protection up to IP21.
However, if they are mounted in a cabinet with a degree of protection higher than IP21, a fan
must be installed above the modules to avoid the formation of hotspots.
The table below specifies the required volumetric flows and the average rates of flow within a
canopy (400 mm high).
If a single module is installed in a cabinet with IP54 degree of protection, then the fan can be
dispensed with if the required volumetric flow for the module is <0.01 m³/s.
If several modules are installed in the same cabinet, then the required volumetric flow
corresponds to the total volumetric flows of the individual components.
In configurations where a number of cabinet canopies are interconnected, the total
volumetric flow must also be calculated and a fan selected accordingly.
Table 9- 5 Required fan flow rate through the power unit for degree of protection > IP21
Type Required volumetric flow dv/dt of Average rate of flow

roof-mounted fan [m³/s] [m/s]
Power Module FL, 210 A (400 V) 0.003 0.01
Power Module FL, 260 A (400 V) 0.003 0.02
Power Module GL, 310 A (400 V) 0.004 0.02
Power Module GL, 490 A (400 V) 0.006 0.03

Type Required volumetric flow dv/dt of Average rate of flow

roof-mounted fan [m³/s] [m/s]
Basic Line Module FBL, 740 A (400 V) 0.010 0.05
Basic Line Module GBL, 1420 A (400 V) 0.024 0.12
Active Line Module GXL, 490 A (400 V) 0.006 0.03

Active Line Module HXL, 840 A (400 V) 0.010 0.05
Active Line Module HXL, 575 A (690 V) 0.006 0.03
Active Line Module JXL, 1422 A (690 V) 0.024 0.12
Motor Module FXL, 210 A (400 V) 0.002 0.01

Motor Module GXL, 310 A (400 V) 0.004 0.02
Motor Module GXL, 490 A (400 V) 0.006 0.03
Motor Module HXL, 605 A (400 V) 0.007 0.04
Motor Module JXL, 985 A (400 V) 0.020 0.10
Recommended fan: EBM-Papst, type W2E200-HH38-01
Note
Note regarding vertical installation
It must be ensured that the ambient temperature of the device in the cabinet does not
exceed 45 °C at any location. From 45° C to 50° C, see derating data.

9.3.2 Horizontal installation

The SINAMICS S120 liquid-cooled devices can operate in a vertical position with the device
resting on its rear panel.
To prevent heat concentrations inside the devices in this mounting position, an external fan
needs to be installed which is capable of removing heated air from the devices, see
Volumetric air flow and fans required (Page 302).
A baffle (referred to below as air distribution baffle) must also be mounted above the device.
This ensures that the air is sucked through the IP20 covers in an even distribution over the
entire length of the device, thereby ensuring that even components at the bottom left of the
device remain within the permissible tolerance range (see figure below).
The components required for a horizontal mounting position can be seen in the Figure below.
Figure 9-9 Basic layout for horizontal installation position (side view)
The height h (the distance between the device top edge (horizontal) and the air distribution
baffle A) must be in the range 25 mm < h < 60 mm!
Requirement for air distribution baffle ("A")
With a single device (Power Module, Basic Line Module, Active Line Module or Motor Module)
or Motor Module with Basic Line Module / Active Line Module installed adjacent: Air
distribution baffle A is closed, the side openings ensure adequate distribution of air flow.
For configurations with several devices mounted adjacently, air distribution baffle A must be
perforated. The perforation must be designed such that up to 60% of the opening area is in
the lower device half (in the figure above, between X1 and X2).
9.3.2.1 Housing for air guidance

The fan(s) can suck the air out of the device only if air cannot be sucked in between the
device and the fan. A housing (enclosure/partition) must therefore be provided between the
fan and the device.

9.3.2.2 Motor connection cover

The motor connection on a horizontally mounted module must be covered. This cover must
be perforated. The perforations should have an opening area of 8 x 30 mm with a perforation
spacing of 3 to 5 mm.
9.3.2.3 Volumetric air flow and fans required
Note
Notes for installation in control cabinets
The SINAMICS S120 liquid-cooled devices have IP20 degree of protection with the exception
of the electrical connections (overall degree of protection IP00).
Depending on the degree of protection of the cabinet, it must be guaranteed that the
thermal losses in the cabinet are extracted from the cabinet using a fan or an air/water heat
exchanger.
the respective thermal losses can be found in the technical data of each individual device.
We recommend that a heat run is performed in order to be able to maintain the temperature
ranges specified in the technical data also when installed in a cabinet.
The following table lists the fans required for different module types and also specifies the
volumetric flow which must be provided through the SINAMICS device. These are minimum
values, without taking into account additional components in the cabinet (e.g. fuses,
busbars, etc.). The additional power losses must be taken into account.
If the specified fan is not available, an alternative fan can be used provided that its
characteristic is higher than that of the fan recommended (fan with higher air flow rate).
Data sheets for the recommended fan with characteristic (minimum requirement) are
available on request from EBM-Papst.
Table 9- 6 Volumetric flow requirement and number of fans needed for horizontal mounting
Type Required volumetric Number of fans

air flow Papst 4114NXH or Papst 4114NHH or
[m³/s] Papst 4184NXH (120 x 120 mm) *)
Power Module, frame sizes FL, GL 0.015 1
Basic Line Module FBL, 740 A (400 V), 420 A (690 V) 0.027 1
Basic Line Module FBL, 1220 A (400 V), 730 A (690 V) 0.044 2
Basic Line Module GBL 0.063 2
Active Line Module GXL, Motor Module FXL, GXL 0.015 1
Active Line Module HXL, Motor Module HXL 0.025 1
Active Line Module JXL, Motor Module JXL 0.063 2
*) Available from info2@de.ebmpapst.com

Note
Note regarding horizontal installation
If the measures recommended above are not implemented, the equipment might
malfunction during operation at air temperatures as low as approx. 30 °C. This is because the
current transformers would be operated at excessively high temperatures!
9.3.3 Coolant connection

The coolant connection must be designed to prevent any coolant leakage into the device. It is
advisable to empty the coolant hoses before connecting them and to close the heat sink
before removing the coolant hoses.


Cooling circuit, coolant properties and protection
against condensation 10
WARNING
Non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
Note
Contact addresses
The contact addresses for companies named in this section are available on request from
your local Siemens sales office.
10.1 Cooling circuits
General information
The type of heat sink materials used requires two distinctly different heat exchange concepts.
Different materials are used to guide the coolant into the cooling plates of the SINAMICS
S120 liquid-cooled devices, providing the user with a range of different options for the design
of the cooling circuit.
The electrochemical processes that take place in a cooling system must be minimized by
choosing the right materials. For this reason, mixed installations, i.e. a combination of
different materials, such as copper, brass, iron, or halogenated plastic (PVC hoses and seals),
should not be used or should be limited to the absolutely essential minimum. The materials
must be selected so that no electrical corrosion occurs (electro-chemical series of metals), see
Chapter "Materials (Page 333)".

Cooling circuit, coolant properties and protection against condensation
Please read the following definitions for clarification:

1. Closed cooling circuit
The pressure compensator is closed (no ingress of oxygen) and is fitted with a pressure-relief
valve (< 6 bar); it is always connected on the suction side of the pump. A separate pressure-
relief valve (<6 bar) must be connected to the discharge side of the pump. The coolant is
guided only through the SINAMICS devices, the heat exchange components and possibly to
a motor (for example, see Figure below). The materials used in the cooling circuit comply
with the specifications provided in Chapter "Materials (Page 333)".
2. Semi-open cooling circuit
Oxygen can only enter the coolant through the pressure equalization tank, otherwise the
same as for 1.
The coolant is fed through the SINAMICS devices, and the components required for cooling,
as well as through third-party components. This is only possible for components with
stainless steel heat sinks.
Table 10- 1 Cooling circuit for SINAMICS devices
SINAMICS devices Basic Line Module, frame sizes FBL, GBL Power Modules, frame sizes FL, GL
Active Line Module, frame sizes HXL, JXL Active Line Module, frame size GXL
Motor Modules, frame sizes HXL, JXL Motor Modules, frame sizes FXL, GXL
Active Interface Module, frame size JIL
Heat sink material Aluminum Stainless steel
Closed cooling circuit The closed cooling circuit is the recom- The closed cooling circuit is the recom-
mended standard solution! mended standard solution!
Only permissible with antifreeze and inhibi- Only permissible with inhibitors with the
tors with the appropriate concentration, see appropriate concentration, see Chapter
Chapter "Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors "Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors (Page 330)".
(Page 330)".
Closed common cooling circuit Not permissible! Only permissible with inhibitors with the
(with motor) appropriate concentration, see Chapter
"Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors (Page 330)".
Semi-open common cooling Not permissible! Only permissible with inhibitors with the
circuit (open pressure com- appropriate concentration, see Chapter
pensation tank) "Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors (Page 330)".
Pressure
The maximum permissible system pressure is 600 kPa. The lowest possible pressure should
be selected to allow use of pumps with a flat characteristic.
Maximum permissible differential pressure for a heat sink: 150 kPa (is applicable for water as
coolant).
The layout must be selected such that the total length of feed and discharge line is equal for
each SINAMICS device or motor.
It is not permissible to use water cooling systems with devices or devices and motors
connected in series as the increased volumetric flow increases the risk of cavitation and
abrasion.

Coolant temperature
To prevent condensation, the coolant temperature should be controlled depending on the
ambient temperature and the air humidity. Condensation on the device is not permissible.
The coolant temperature ranges are specified in Chapters "Technical specifications (Page 36)"
and "Derating factors (Page 39)".
Operation with a coolant temperature between 0° C and 5° C is only permitted with
antifreeze. Operation below 0° C is also not permitted with antifreeze.
Volume flow monitoring

The devices are equipped with volume flow monitoring. If the average output flow is less
than the rated flow, then the volume flow may also be correspondingly lower. If occasionally
overloads occur during operation with the average output flow that are higher than the
average output flow, then the rated volume flow must also be provided.
It must be ensured that the volume flow is never zero.
Installation
The connection between the devices and cooling system should be designed with hoses for
mechanical decoupling.
The following hose types are recommended:
• EPDM hoses with an electrical resistance >109 ohms, e.g. Semperflex FKD supplied by
Semperit, or
• DEMITTEL made of PE / EPDM supplied by Telle
• Secured with clamps conforming to DIN 2871, available, e.g. from the Telle company, see
Table in Chapter "Materials (Page 333)".
The following information must be observed when installing the cooling circuit:
• Seals must be free of chloride, graphite and rust.
• As a result of negative experience with Teflon, Viton, AFM34 and EPDM are recommended
instead.
• In order to prevent cavitation damage to the pump (but also in the heat sink), the pressure
on the suction side of the pump must be a minimum of 30 kPa, or the geodesic height
from the reservoir to the pump suction side must be >3 m (see the diagram in Chapter
"Preventing cavitation (Page 311)").
• To prevent blockages and corrosion, it is advisable also to install a flushback filter in the
circuit (so that residues can be rinsed out when the system is running). The flushback filter
must not be bridged by a bypass circuit.

Note
• Leaks
10.1.1 Cooling circuit for aluminium heat sinks

To ensure an optimum heat sink service life, please note the following specifications for the
aluminum heat sinks (Active Interface Module JIL, Basic Line Modules FBL and GBL, Active
Line Modules HXL and JXL, Motor Modules HXL and JXL):
• Closed cooling circuit made of stainless steel or ABS which transfers heat to a cooling
system via a water-to-water heat exchanger.
• Cooling circuit pipes, fittings made of stainless steel (Nirosta) or steel (ST37) with
antifreeze in the coolant.

Figure 10-1 Recommendation for closed circuit
Dirt traps (strainers), at least one pressure measuring point and a service inspection window
are important.
Table 10- 2 Components of the closed cooling circuit
Component Explanation
1. Pressure relief valve Required in cooling circuits with aluminum owing to the hydroxide reaction with H2 as
the reaction product.
2. Pressure compensator (pres- Closed pressure compensator if possible on the suction side of the pump, normal type
surizer) used for heating systems suitable only for closed cooling circuits, with antifreeze, see
Chapter Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors (Page 330).
3. Pressure relief- dP valve Required for systems with very powerful pumps and to dissipate H2.
4. Pump Delivery area made of stainless steel, avoid use of cast iron wherever possible.
5. Connecting cables Stainless steel, also common steel in closed circuits with antifreeze in the coolant.
6 Sight glass Recommended for diagnosing turbidity and discoloration of the coolant which can indi-
cate ageing or corrosion problems.
7. Dirt trap (strainer), mesh Dissolved substances (reaction products) must be trapped before they cause blockages
width ≤100 µm in the heat sink!
8. Pressure measuring location Required for servicing.
9. Connecting hose EPDM hose
10. Heat exchanger Ideally of stainless steel, also copper-brazed in closed circuits.
11. Bypass valve The customer must take measures to protect the devices against condensation, e.g. with
a bypass valve.
It must be ensured that unfiltered cooling water does not get into the cooling circuit of
the converter.
12. Coolant See Chapter Coolant properties (Page 328).

10.1.2 Cooling circuit for stainless steel heat sinks

To ensure an optimum heat sink service life, please note the following specification for the
stainless steel heat sinks (Power Modules FL and GL, Active Line Modules GXL, Motor Modules
FXL and GXL):
• Semi-open cooling circuit made of stainless steel or ABS, which transfers heat to a cooling
system via a water-to-water heat exchanger.
• Cooling circuit pipes, fittings made of stainless steel (Nirosta) or steel (ST37) with
antifreeze in the coolant.
Figure 10-2 Recommendation for open circuit
Note
Requirements regarding the coolant reservoir
It must be guaranteed that the coolant is cooled down in the coolant reservoir.
Note
Arrangement of the devices in the cooling circuit
When arranging the devices in the cooling circuit, please note that the SINAMICS S120
devices must always be positioned upstream of the motors.
Dirt traps (strainer) with a mesh width ≤100 µm, at least one pressure measuring point and a
sight class are important for service.
The customer must take measures (e.g. by monitoring the level) that the level in the coolant
reservoir does not fall below a certain height.
Air bubbles in the coolant can cause the device to overheat. Information on venting is
provided in Chapter "Commissioning (Page 340)".

10.1.3 Preventing cavitation

The following applies to all cooling circuits:
• The cooling circuit must always be designed in such a way that the pressure compensator
is located on the suction side of the pump and as close as possible to the pump (see
Figure below).
• The minimum pressure on the suction side of the pump must be approximately 30 kPa
(0.3 bar), or the geodesic height from the reservoir to the pump suction side must be
>3 m.
• The pressure drop across a SINAMICS device must not exceed 200 kPa (2 bar) in
continuous operation, as the resultant increase in volumetric flow increases the risk of
cavitation and/or abrasion.
• The guidelines given in Chapter Cooling circuit configuring information (Page 312)
regarding series connections and maximum pressure must also be followed.
Figure 10-3 Arrangement of pressure compensator, component pressure drops

10.1.4 Cooling circuit configuring information

The operating pressure must be set according to the flow conditions in the supply and return
lines of the cooling circuit. The required coolant flow rate per time unit must be set according
to the technical data of the relevant devices. The devices are normalized to a rated pressure
of 70 kPa (for water as coolant) using an orifice (throttle).
If a mixture of antifreeze and water is used as a coolant, the rated pressure must be
calculated according to the ratio.
The maximum permissible pressure to atmosphere in the heat sink and thus in the cooling
circuit must not exceed 6 bar. If the pump used can reach a maximum pressure in excess of
this value, appropriate measures (safety valve p ≤ 6 bar, pressure control or similar) must be
implemented by the customer to ensure that the maximum pressure limit is not exceeded.
The lowest possible differential pressure between the coolant in the supply and return lines
should be selected to allow use of pumps with a flat characteristic.
The maximum differential pressure across a heat sink is 150 kPa (for water as coolant); higher
differential pressures significantly increase the risk of cavitation and abrasion.
Figure 10-4 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow

Water cooling systems with series-connected SINAMICS devices cannot be recommended for
the following reasons:
• The risk of cavitation and abrasion increases as a result of the high total volumetric flow.
• It is not possible to connect SINAMICS S120 in series because the total volumetric flow
inherent to any series connection requires system pressures in the 600 kPa range or
above.
The characteristic curves for the pressure drop across the heat sinks as a function of the
volumetric flow vary depending on the temperature and the antifreeze and water coolant
combination, as can be seen in the following figures.
Coolant mixture comprising Antifrogen N or Dowcal 100 and water

The following diagrams show the pressure drop as a function of the volumetric flow rates for
the different SINAMICS S120 liquid-cooled components when using Antifrogen N or Dowcal
100.
Dowcal 100 has the same flow attribute as Antifrogen N.
Figure 10-5 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Basic Line Module, frame size FBL

Figure 10-6 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Basic Line Module, frame size GBL

Figure 10-7 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Power Module frame size FL, and Motor Module frame size
FXL

Figure 10-8 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Power Module frame size GL, Active Line Module and Motor
Module frame size GXL

Figure 10-9 Pressure drop as a function of flow rate for Power Module frame size HL, Active Line Module and Motor Module
frame size HXL

Figure 10-10 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Active Line Module and Motor Module, frame size JXL

Figure 10-11 Pressure drop as a function of the flow rate for Active Interface Modules, frame size JIL, 10 l/min
Figure 10-12 Pressure drop as a function of the flow rate for Active Interface Modules, frame size JIL, 16 l/min

Coolant mixture comprising Antifrogen L and water

The following diagrams show the pressure drop as a function of the volumetric flow rates for
the different SINAMICS S120 liquid-cooled components when using Antifrogen L.
Figure 10-13 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Basic Line Module, frame size FBL

Figure 10-14 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Basic Line Module, frame size GBL

Figure 10-15 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Power Module frame size FL, and Motor Module frame size
FXL

Figure 10-16 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Power Module frame size GL, Active Line Module and Motor
Module frame size GXL

Figure 10-17 Pressure drop as a function of flow rate for Power Module frame size HL, Active Line Module and Motor Module
frame size HXL

Figure 10-18 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Active Line Module and Motor Module, frame size JXL

Figure 10-19 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Active Interface Module, frame size JIL, 10 l/min
Figure 10-20 Pressure drop as a function of volumetric flow for Active Interface Module, frame size JIL, 16 l/min

Dimensioning the cooling circuit

Recommendation for dimensioning the cooling circuit:
The differential pressure between the supply and return lines should be selected such that
the following applies:
The individual pressure drops Pi represent the pressure drops of components (heat
exchanger, piping, 70 kPa for the SINAMICS devices connected in parallel, valves, dirt traps,
pipe bends, etc.).
WARNING
Electric shock due to incorrectly laid coolant lines
Incorrectly laid coolant lines can come into contact with live parts and components and can
result in danger to life as a result of electric shock.
• Lay coolant lines so that they cannot come into contact with live components. Maintain
an insulating clearance (clearances and creepage distances) of > 13 mm.
• Mechanically secure the coolant lines and check that they have no leaks.
10.1.5 Equipotential bonding

All components in the cooling system (SINAMICS units, heat exchanger, piping system,
pump, pressure compensator, etc.) must be connected to an equipotential bonding system.
This must be realized using a copper bar or stranded copper with the appropriate conductor
cross-sections to prevent electrochemical processes from occurring.
If the installation comprises more than one control cabinet, they must be bolted together to
establish a good electrical connection (e.g. bolt cabinet cross-beams together directly at
several points to establish a good electrical connection). This eliminates potential differences
and thus the risk of electrochemical corrosion. A PE bar must be installed in every cabinet
(including the cooling system) and the individual bars then interconnected.

10.2 Coolant definition
10.2.1 Coolant properties

The coolant must fulfill the following requirements over the long term.
The coolant comprises a coolant basis and antifreeze, see "Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors
(Page 330)".
Table 10- 3 Coolant specifications for aluminum heat sinks
Basis coolant Distilled, demineralized water (completely desalinated water) or deionized water
with reduced electrical conductivity according to ISO 3696, quality 3
or based on IEC 60993 with the following values:
pH value 5.0 ... 8.0
Electrical conductivity ≤ 30 µS/cm (3 mS/m)
Components that can be oxidized < 30 mg/l
as oxygen content
Residue after vaporization and < 10 mg/kg
drying at 110 °C
Table 10- 4 Coolant specifications for stainless steel heat sinks 1)
Basis coolant Filtered drinking, process and cooling water with the following quality:
Electrical conductivity < 2500 µS/cm (250 mS/m)
pH value 6.5 ... 9.0
Total salt content TDS < 1550 mg/l
Chloride ions (Cl-) < 250 mg/l
Sodium (Na+) < 200 mg/l
Sulfate ions (SO42-) < 240 mg/l
Sulfide ions (S2-) < 1 mg/l
Nitrate ions (NO3-) < 50 mg/l
Iron < 1 mg/l
Silicate < 10 mg/l
Ammonia (NH3), ammonium (NH4+) < 1 mg/l
Total hardness < 1.78 mmol/l (corresponds to 10 °dH)
of which, maximum:
- calcium hardness < 1.25 mmol/l (corresponds to 7 °dH or 50 mg/l calcium)
- magnesium hardness < 1.43 mmol/l (corresponds to 8 °dH or 35 mg/l magnesium)
- carbonate hardness < 0.45 mmol/l earth alkali equivalent (corresponds to 2.5 °dH)
That corresponds to < 0.9 mmol/l hydrogen carbonate (HCO3-) or < 0.45 mmol/l car-
bonate (CO3 2-).
Suspended solids / suspended sub-
stances: < 340 mg/l
- solids < 100 µm
- size of entrained particles
1) The requirements relating to the coolant are also applicable for the Power Modules with a copper-nickel alloy heat ex-
changer.

Note
Suitable cooling water
Distilled, demineralized water, also known as deionized water, completely desalinated water
(VE water) or Deionat, is not suitable by itself as coolant.
It can be used as basis when using antifreeze.
Note
Analyzing the liquid coolant
It is recommended that you contact the coolant manufacturer to analyze the liquid coolant.
The coolant should be checked 3 months after the cooling circuit is filled for the first time
and, subsequently, once a year.
If the cooling water becomes cloudy, is colored, or becomes contaminated by mold spores,
the cooling circuit must be cleaned and refilled.
To better explain the coolant specifications in this document, a number of problems which
can be encountered if these specifications are ignored are listed in the table below.
Table 10- 5 Substances which can cause irreparable heat sink damage
Problem Possible causes/consequences Countermeasure

Properties of the coolant or limit value
exceeded
Increase corrosion, Sea water Do not use sea water!
deposits Water compliant with limit values Use an appropriate concentration of antifreeze, cool-
ing circuit must include a pressure-relief valve.
Chloride Use the specified coolant basis and the appropriate
concentration of antifreeze.
Sulfate Dilute with deionized water until the limit value is
reached.
Semi-open cooling Ingress of oxygen Use a closed cooling circuit equipped with a pressure
circuit relief valve, the specified coolant basis and the appro-
priate concentration of antifreeze.
Erosion/particles Suspended solids (e.g. sand) Rinse cooling circuit without SINAMICS devices. Install
dirt trap (e.g. strainers, fine filters).
Whitish deposits Excessively high total hardness Use the specified coolant basis and the appropriate
concentration of antifreeze.
Electro corrosion Voltage potential can be identified Connect all components to equipotential bonding
Inadequate equipotential bonding system. Device connected using a high ohmic hose.
Deposits, residues, Biological contamination Use of biocides, dirt traps (e.g. strainers, fine filters).
algae Oil residue Use the appropriate concentration of antifreeze, flush
cooling circuit without SINAMICS.
Mechanical contamination Rinse cooling circuit without SINAMICS devices. Install
dirt trap (e.g. strainers, fine filters).

10.2.2 Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors
Table 10- 6 Overview and application of approved coolant additives
Application with SINAMICS Application with SINAMICS Please note the following in
S120, liquid-cooled, S120, liquid-cooled, particular
with aluminum heat sink with stainless steel heat sink
Anti- Antifrogen N, 25 % < X ≤ 45 % Antifrogen N, 25 % < X ≤ 45 % For Antifrogen L, for the same
freeze/inhibitor Antifrogen L, 25 % < X ≤ 48 % Antifrogen L, 25 % < X ≤ 48 % antifreeze protection, a higher
concentration is required than
Dowcal 100, 25 % < X ≤ 45 % Dowcal 100, 25 % < X ≤ 45 % for Antifrogen N
Biocide* Yes Yes Cooling circuit with open pres-
Antifrogen N, minimum quantity Antifrogen N, minimum quantity surizer
25% 25%
Antifrogen L, minimum quantity Antifrogen L, minimum quantity
25 % 25 %
Dowcal 100, minimum quantity Dowcal 100, minimum quantity
25 % 25 %
Antifreeze + Antifreeze already has a biocidal Antifreeze already has a biocidal
biocide* effect in the minimum concentra- effect in the minimum concentra-
tion specified above. tion specified above.
Inhibitor Required Not required
Fuchs Anticorit S 2000 A
ratio of 4 ... 5 %
* Effectiveness regarding the growth of microorganisms
Note
Combination of different heat sinks in one common cooling circuit
For a combination of liquid-cooled devices with aluminum heat sinks and stainless steel heat
sinks, then the specifications for the aluminum heat sinks always apply.
Antifreeze
Only the following agents can be used as antifreeze:
• Antifrogen N (chemical basis: Ethylene glycol, manufacturer: Clariant) with a percentage X
of 25% < X ≤ 45% is the anti-freeze used. Coolants containing 45% Antifrogen N provide
protection down to -30° C.
• Antifrogen L (chemical basis: Propylene glycol, manufacturer: Clariant) with a percentage
X of 25% < X ≤ 48% is the anti-freeze used. Coolants containing 48% Antifrogen L provide
protection down to -30° C.
• Dowcal 100 (chemical basis: Ethylene glycol, manufacturer: DOW) used with a percentage
X of 25 % < X ≤ 45 %. A Dowcal 100 percentage of 45 % provides frost protection down to
-30 °C.
All agents contain anti-corrosion inhibitors which permanently protect the metal in the
cooling system against corrosion.
It is particularly important to ensure that the percentage of antifreeze when topping up the
cooling system always corresponds to the minimum quantity, otherwise the mixture becomes
corrosive.

NOTICE
Material damage caused by incorrectly adding antifreeze
Incorrectly adding antifreeze to the cooling circuit can result in material damage caused by
corrosion and cooling circuit leaks.
• Always mix the coolant outside the cooling circuit before filling it.
• Do not add the individual cooling components one after the other.
NOTICE
Damage caused by leaks if the appropriate concentration of antifreeze is not used
An insufficient concentration of antifreeze can result in material damage caused by
• Regularly check the antifreeze concentration. Add the appropriate amount of antifreeze
when required.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by mixing different antifreeze products
Incorrectly adding antifreeze to the cooling circuit can result in material damage caused by
• Do not use different antifreeze products in a common cooling circuit.
• When changing the antifreeze, you must first empty the cooling circuit and flush it out
before filling the new coolant. To do this, refer to the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the antifreeze.
Biocide
Cooling circuits with soft water (°dH>4) are susceptible to microbes. The risk of corrosion
caused by microbes is virtually non-existent in chlorinated drinking water systems.
No strain of bacteria can survive when the appropriate quantity of antifreeze is added.
The following types of bacteria are encountered in practice:
• Slime-forming bacteria
• Corrosive bacteria
• Iron-depositing bacteria
The type of bacteria determines the suitability of a biocide. At least one water analysis per
annum (to determine the number of bacterial colonies) is recommended. We recommend
that a biocide is used depending on the ambient conditions – and that the compatibility with
the components in the cooling circuit is carefully checked.

Note
Determining the appropriate biocide
The type of bacteria determines the biocide.
The concentration must be adapted to be in compliance with what the manufacturer
recommends.
It is not permissible that biocides and antifreeze are mixed.
Antifreeze already has a biocidal effect in the minimum concentration specified above.
Inhibitors
When using one of the approved antifreezes, an inhibitor is already included with the
specified concentration.
When operated without antifreeze, then Fuchs Anticorit S 2000 A inhibitor must be added
with a ratio of 4 ... 5 %.

10.3 Materials
10.3 Materials
The following table lists a wide variety of materials and components which are permissible or
not permissible for use in a cooling circuit.
Table 10- 7 Materials and components of a cooling circuit
Material Used as Application with SINAMICS S120 liquid-cooled

Aluminum Pipes, valves and fittings Not recommended as a result of potential material erosion.
Zinc Pipes, valves and fittings Do not use zinc!
Brass Pipes, valves and fittings Can be used in closed circuits with antifreeze.
Nickel Nickel solder in the heat Can be used in closed circuits with antifreeze.
exchanger
Copper Pipes, valves and fittings Can be used only in closed circuits with antifreeze/inhibitor in
which the heat sink and copper component are separated (e.g.
connection hose on devices). Copper should not be used or be
restricted to the absolutely essential minimum.
Common steel (e.g. St37) Pipes Permissible in closed circuits with antifreeze, check for oxide
formation, inspection window/sight glass recommended.
Cast steel, cast iron Pipes, motors Closed circuit and use of strainers and flushback filters.
Fe separator for stainless heat sink.
High-alloy steel, Group 1 Pipe, valves and fittings, Can be used for drinking or tap water with a chloride content up
(V2A) heat exchanger to < 250 mg/l, suitable according to definition in Chapter Coolant
properties (Page 328).
High-alloy steel, Group 2 Pipe, valves and fittings, Can be used for drinking or tap water with a chloride content up
(V4A) heat exchanger to < 500 mg/l, suitable according to definition in Chapter Coolant
properties (Page 328).
Installation made of different Pipe, valves and fittings, Do not use a mixed installation.
materials (mixed installation) heat exchanger
PE (polyethylene) Pipes Do not use PE (polyethylene) for water pipes because they are
too long.
PVC Pipes, valves and fittings, Do not use PVC!
hoses
Hoses Reduce the use of hoses to a minimum (device connection). Must
not be used as the main line for the whole system.
Recommendation: EPDM hoses with an electrical resistance
1 MΩ/m, (e.g. Semperflex FKD supplied by Semperit, or
DEMITTEL of PE/EPD supplied by Telle)
Gaskets Pipes, valves and fittings Use of Viton, AFM34, EPDM is recommended.
Hose connections Pipe-hose transition Secure with clamps conforming to DIN2817, available, e.g. from
the Telle company.

10.4 Anti-condensation measures
Note
• Leaks
10.4 Anti-condensation measures

The customer must take measures to protect the devices against condensation.
If condensation occurs in the device, it must be de-energized and dried before switching on
again.
Condensation normally occurs at the intake connection of the devices.
Condensation occurs when the inlet temperature of the coolant is significantly lower than
room temperature (ambient temperature). The permissible temperature difference between
coolant and air varies as a function of the relative humidity ϕ of the ambient air. The air
temperature at which the aqueous phase drops out is referred to as the "dew point".
The table below shows the dew points (in °C) for an atmospheric pressure of 1 bar
(≈ installation altitude, 0 to 500 m). If the temperature of the coolant is below the specified
value, condensation may occur, i.e. the coolant temperature must always be ≥ the dew point
temperature.
The coolant temperature must be controlled according to the following table.

10.5 Examples of coolant control
Table 10- 8 Dew point temperature as a function of relative air humidity ϕ and room temperature at an installation altitude
of 0 m.
T room φ=20% φ=30% φ=40% φ=50% φ=60% φ=70% φ=80% φ=85% φ=90% φ=95% φ=100%
[° C]
10 <0 <0 <0 0.2 2.7 4.8 6.7 7.6 8.4 9.2 10
20 <0 2 6 9.3 12 14.3 16.4 17.4 18.3 19.1 20
25 0.6 6.3 10.5 13.8 16.7 19.1 21.2 22.2 23.2 24.1 24.9
30 4.7 10.5 14.9 18.4 21.3 23.8 26.1 27.1 28.1 29 29.9
35 8.7 14.8 19.3 22.9 26 28.6 30.9 32 33 34 34.9
38 11.1 17.4 22 25.7 28.8 31.5 33.8 34.9 36 36.9 37.9
40 12.8 19.1 23.7 27.5 30.6 33.4 35.8 36.9 37.9 38.9 39.9
45 16.8 23.3 28.2 32 35.3 38.1 40.6 41.8 42.9 43.9 44.9
50 20.8 27.5 32.6 36.6 40 42.9 45.5 46.6 47.8 48.9 49.9
The dew point also depends on the absolute pressure, i.e. the installation altitude.
The dew points for low atmospheric pressure are lower than those at an altitude of 0 m, i.e. it
is always acceptable to calculate the coolant supply temperature for an altitude of 0 m.

With liquid-cooled devices, warm ambient air can condense on the cold surfaces of heat sink.
The resulting condensate can cause electrical damage such as leakage current bridges and
flashovers. Condensation must be avoided by means of an appropriate temperature of the
coolant by always maintaining the temperature of the heat sink above the dew point of the
ambient air. This can be achieved either by a permanently set and correspondingly high
coolant temperature, or by controlling the temperature of the coolant in accordance with the
ambient air and the relative humidity.
A temperature control of the coolant adds a temperature difference TL of approximately 1 K
... 3 K above the condensation temperature to the ambient temperature TU and forms the
setpoint Tset for the coolant temperature, see following figure. The control compares the
temperature setpoint with the actual value at the coolant inlet Tact, which can be accessed via
parameter r0037[19]. The coolant temperature control is performed by the three-step
controller with the aid of the servo motor connected to the 3-way valve.
The three-step controller has three switch positions for control of the servo motor:
• +Y1 for forward motion
• 0 for standstill
• –Y1 for backward motion
When the control deviation x exceeds the upper switching hysteresis xu, the servo motor is
switched on, when the deviation falls below the lower switching hysteresis xl, the servo
motor is switched off. When the control deviation falls below the switching hysteresis in the
negative direction, the servomotor runs in the opposite direction until the control deviation
has been cleared and the servomotor is switched off.

From the control point of view, the servomotor at a 3-way valve has an I behavior. The
feedback shown as dotted line is recommended for a stable control with P response.
The 3-way valve is controlled so that the path B-AB is opened when the coolant is cold. The
coolant is led past the heat exchanger and the heat sink is heated by the switching losses of
the power semiconductors. When the coolant inlet temperature Tact reaches the setpoint, the
three-step controller opens the 3-way valve and the path A-AB.
Figure 10-21 Principle of a flow control with 3-way valve as protection against condensation

Example of control of the coolant temperature depending on the relative humidity and the
ambient temperature
The temperature correction value delta TL (ΔTL) is added to the ambient temperature to
maintain the temperature setpoint (Tset) for the coolant. The value depends on the relative
humidity plus 2 °C above the dew point.
Coolant temperature setpoint = ambient temperature + Δ TL
Table 10- 9 ΔTL depends on the humidity
Relative humidity [%] 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85 90 95 100

[° C] 1) 25 18 15 12 9 7 4 3 2 1 0
Delta TL [° C] 2) -23 -16 -13 -10 -7 -5 -2 -1 0 +1 +2
1) Temperature difference to the dew point
2) Condensation point plus 2 °C
If delta TL (ΔTL) is now added to the ambient temperature this provides the setpoint for the
coolant temperature.
Figure 10-22 Examples of the minimum coolant temperature setpoint depending on the humidity for
ambient temperatures of 20, 30 and 40 °C (dew point plus 2 °C)

Figure 10-23 Curve to determine the temperature ΔTL
The temperature ΔTL can be determined according to the characteristic based on the
measured humidity.
Example of the formation of the temperature setpoint of the coolant
① Actual humidity value

② Humidity characteristic – temperature difference
③ Actual ambient temperature value
④ Adder for temperatures
Figure 10-24 Formation of the coolant temperature setpoint
Tmin should be limited to plus 10 °C, Tmax to 50 °C.

Sensors for simultaneous measurement of the relative humidity and temperature can be
supplied, for example, by JUMO.

10.6 Connection methods
Examples of the coolant temperature setpoint depending on the ambient temperature

This method is based on a high humidity (95%). The advantage is that only the ambient
temperature and the coolant temperature are required as actual values for the coolant
temperature control. A sensor for the humidity is not required.
③ Actual ambient temperature value

④ Adder for temperatures
Figure 10-25 Formation of the setpoint depending on the ambient temperature
The temperature difference ΔTL should be 2 °C. Condensation is therefore excluded for a
humidity up to 95%.
SIEMENS cooling units

Cooling units (Heat Exchanger Modules) with a cooling capacity of 32, 48, 72 and 120 kW
can be ordered from Siemens.
Please contact your local Siemens office.
The cooling units in a Siemens control cabinet have a closed-control unit with a bypass valve
as protection against condensation. The risk of condensation can be minimized by manually
setting the coolant temperature using the Siemens control. Recognition of the danger of
condensation due to too high an ambient temperature in relation to the coolant temperature
is integrated as a warning to be issued.
10.6 Connection methods

The electrical connections on the SINAMICS S120 liquid-cooled devices must be made with
cables having the cross-section stipulated in the technical data for the relevant device.
The coolant connection is made using 3/4'' couplings.
A connection with a defined cross-section reduction (throttle) is mounted at the intake to the
devices. As a consequence, the defined 70 kPa pressure drop is kept constant for the
particular flow rate.
The supply and return connections on the SINAMICS devices must be made with flexible, non-
conductive hose (see Section "Materials") so as to eliminate the risk of electrochemical
corrosion, to reduce transfer of vibration and to dampen pressure transients in the coolant.
The hose should be about 0.5 m in length (total of supply and return lines).
The coolant hoses should be connected before the devices are mounted.

10.7 Commissioning
Figure 10-26 Coolant connections
10.7 Commissioning
Commissioning the cooling circuit

Once the modules have been installed in the plant, the coolant circuit must be commissioned
before the electrical systems.
Venting the heat sink

In some devices the heat sink has to be vented when it is being filled, depending on the
device type and the frame size.
• It is not necessary to vent the heat sinks on Power Modules, frame sizes FL and GL, on
Active Interface Module, frame size JXL, on Active Line Modules, frame size JXL and on
Motor Modules, frame sizes FXL and GXL before they are filled for the first time.
• The heat sinks on Basic Line Modules, frame sizes FBL, GBL, on Active Line Modules, frame
sizes HXL, JXL and on Motor Modules, frames sizes HXL, JXL must be vented before they
are filled for the first time.
– For this purpose, the devices are fitted with a vent valve at the top and a vent hose at
the bottom. The air and/or coolant can be bled out of the device via this hose and
collected underneath so that it cannot leak into the module.
– A stopper is inserted in the lower end of the vent hose at the factory. This must be
removed before the heat sink is vented and inserted again afterwards.

10.7 Commissioning
Venting the heat sink with removal of the front electronic fan
On the following Basic Line Modules the front electronic fan must be removed in order to
operate the venting lever:
• 6SL3335-1TE41-2AA3 (380 to 480 V, 1220 A, 600 kW)
• 6SL3335-1TE41-7AA3 (380 to 480 V, 1730 A, 830 kW)
• 6SL3335-1TG41-3AA3 (500 to 690 V, 1300 A, 1100 kW)
• 6SL3335-1TG41-7AA3 (500 to 690 V, 1650 A, 1370 kW)
The necessary steps following removal of the top housing cover are shown in the illustration
below.
Figure 10-27 Removal of the electronic fan to operate the venting lever

10.8 Service
The numbering below corresponds to the numbers in the figure.

1. Remove the lower fastening screw for the plug-in electronics module / the front electronic
fan.
2. Detach the plug connection of the power cable for the front electronic fan.
3. Tilt the electronic fan forward and remove it.
4. The venting lever (behind the electronic fan) is now freely accessible.
WARNING
Electric shock due to discharge of coolant
A discharge of coolant can result in short-circuits with damage and malfunctions up to
death or serious injury.
• Make sure that liquid-cooled devices are completely dry before being switched on and
put into operation.
• Ensure that no liquid coolant is sprayed onto the devices or additionally mounted
electrical components during venting.
• Switch off immediately if there are any leaks causing liquid to escape (drips or pools).
NOTICE
Failure of the cooling due to air bubbles in the cooling circuit
Air bubbles in the cooling circuit impair the correct cooling function.
• Make sure there are no air bubbles in the cooling circuit by venting.
10.8 Service
Service
Recommended service activities for the cooling circuit are described in Chapter "Maintenance
(Page 343)".

Maintenance and servicing 11
11.1 Chapter content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• Maintenance and servicing procedures that have to be carried out on a regular basis to
ensure the availability of the components.
• Exchanging device components when the device is serviced
• Forming the DC-link capacitors
WARNING
WARNING
Electric shock from external supply voltages
When the external power supply or the external 230 V AC auxiliary supply is connected,
dangerous voltages are still present in components even when the main switch is open.
• Switch off external supply voltages and external 230 V AC auxiliary supply before
opening the device.
11.2 Maintenance
The devices comprise mostly electronic components. Apart from the electronic fan(s),
therefore, they contain hardly any components that are subject to mechanical wear or that
require maintenance or servicing. Maintenance is intended to ensure that the equipment
remains in the specified condition. Inspections must be performed regularly, but at least once
a year. Where necessary, contaminants must be removed and wearing parts replaced.
The following points must generally be observed.

Maintenance and servicing
11.2 Maintenance
Cleaning
Dust deposits
Dust deposits inside the device must be removed at regular intervals (or at least once a year)
by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations. The unit must be cleaned
using a brush and vacuum cleaner, and dry compressed air (max. 1 bar) for areas that cannot
be easily reached.
Ventilation
The ventilation openings in the devices must never be obstructed. The electronic fans must
be checked to make sure that they are functioning correctly.
Cable and screw terminals
Cable and screw terminals must be checked regularly to ensure that they are secure in
position, and if necessary, retightened. Cabling must be checked for defects. Defective parts
must be replaced immediately.
Checking for leaks

The cooling system should be checked for leaks whenever maintenance is carried out.
Note
Maintenance intervals
The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the
installation conditions (cabinet environment) and the operating conditions.
Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further details,
contact your regional office or sales office.
Service for the cooling circuit

The following service is recommended for the cooling circuit:
• The coolant should be checked 3 months after the cooling circuit is filled for the first time
and, subsequently, once a year.
When analyzing the coolant, the concentration and the general conditions of the
inhibitor/antifreeze should be checked.
• If the cooling water becomes cloudy, is colored, or becomes contaminated by mold
spores, the cooling circuit must be cleaned and refilled.
• It is recommended that you contact the coolant manufacturer to analyze the liquid
coolant.
• If the coolant level has dropped, the loss should be corrected for closed or semi-open
circuits with a prepared mixture of coolant basis and antifreeze, see Chapters "Coolant
properties (Page 328)" and "Antifreeze, biocides, inhibitors (Page 330)".

11.3 Servicing
Maintaining coolant hoses

The coolant hoses must be inspected in regular intervals for cracks and leaks. If there are any
leakages at the hose joints, the flat seal may need to be replaced.
EPDM hoses with cracks or that the leak should be replaced.
11.3 Servicing
Servicing involves activities and procedures for maintaining and restoring the specified
condition of the devices.
Required tools
The following tools are required for replacing components:
• Standard set of tools with screwdrivers, screw wrenches, socket wrenches, etc.
• Torque wrenches 1.5 Nm up to 100 Nm
• 600 mm extension for socket wrenches
Tightening torques for screw connections

The following tightening torques apply when tightening current-conducting connections (DC
link, motor connections, busbars, cable lugs) and other connections (ground connections, PE
connections).
Table 11- 1 Tightening torques for screw connections
Thread Ground connections, PE connec- Aluminum threaded connections,

tions, steel threaded connections plastic, busbars, cable lugs
M3 1.3 Nm 0.8 Nm
M4 3 Nm 1.8 Nm
M5 6 Nm 3 Nm
M6 10 Nm 6 Nm
M8 25 Nm 13 Nm
M10 50 Nm 25 Nm
M12 88 Nm 50 Nm
M16 215 Nm 115 Nm
Note
Screw connections for protective covers
The threaded connections for the protective covers made of Makrolon may only be tightened
with 2.5 Nm.

11.4 Replacing components
WARNING
Improper transport and installation of devices and components
Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are
not transported or installed properly.
• Transport, mount, and remove the devices and components only if you are qualified to
do so.
• Take into account that the devices and components are in some cases heavy and top-
heavy and take the necessary precautionary measures.
NOTICE
11.4.2 Messages after replacement of DRIVE-CLiQ components

After DRIVE-CLiQ components are replaced (Control Interface Module, TM31, SMCxx) when
service is required, generally no message is output after power-up, since an identical
component is identified and accepted as component when the system boots.
The reason for this is that an identical component is detected and accepted as spare part
when running-up. If, unexpectedly, a fault message of the "topology fault" category is
displayed, then when replacing a component, one of the following faults/errors should have
occurred:
• A Control Interface Module with different firmware data was installed.
• When connecting-up DRIVE-CLiQ cables, connections were interchanged.

Automatic firmware update

A firmware update for the replaced DRIVE-CLiQ component may run automatically after
switching on the electronics.
• The following LEDs will flash slowly to indicate that an automatic firmware update is in
progress: the "RDY" LED on the Control Unit (orange, 0.5 Hz) and an LED on the relevant
DRIVE-CLiQ component (green/red, 0.5 Hz).
Note
Do not shut down the converter
Do not shut down the converter during this process as the firmware update will otherwise
have to be started again.
• Once the automatic firmware update is complete, the "RDY" LED on the Control Unit will
flash quickly (orange, 2 Hz) along with an LED on the relevant DRIVE-CLiQ component
(green/red, 2 Hz).
• To complete the automatic firmware update process, a POWER ON is required (switch the
device off and back on again).
11.4.3 Mounting equipment for power units
Mounting equipment
The mounting equipment is used to mount or remove liquid-cooled power units (Active Line
Modules, Basic Line Modules, Motor Modules, Power Modules) into or out of a control
cabinet.
The mounting equipment can be used if the power units are mounted on mounting rails,
which at the front have two M6 threads at a vertical distance of 20 mm to attach the
mounting equipment.
The mounting equipment is used to help mount the device; it is placed in front of the power
unit, and attached to the mounting rails below the power unit.
Using the telescopic rails, the mounting equipment can be adapted to the actual mounting
height and the power unit width. The power unit can be removed from the control cabinet
after releasing the mechanical and electrical connections and the coolant connections.
Whereby the power unit is guided and supported by the guide rails on the mounting
equipment. To prevent it toppling over, the power unit must be secured to a crane, tripod or
similar assembly using the lifting lugs or the lifting equipment. The device can then be
lowered down from the mounting equipment.

Figure 11-1 Mounting aid
Article number of the mounting equipment

The article number for the mounting equipment is 6SL3766-1CA00-0AA0.

11.4.4 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Power Module, frame size FL
Replacing the Control Interface Module
Figure 11-2 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Power Module, frame size FL
Preparatory steps
• Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
• Allow unimpeded access
• Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Release the retaining screws for the control module holder and the plug-in electronics
module (2 screws) and remove the control module holder.
2. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables (maximum
five connectors).
3. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at -X41 / -X42 / -X46 (max. 6 connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
4. Remove the retaining screws for the IPD card (2 screws) and remove the IPD card from
connector -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect a maximum of 5
additional connectors one after the other (2 at the top, 3 at the bottom) and the PE
connection (1 screw below).
NOTICE
Damage to the device due to damaged signal cables during disassembly
Signal cables can be damaged when withdrawing the Control Interface Module, which can
result in a device failure.
• When withdrawing the Control Interface Module, ensure that you do not damage any
signal cables.
Installation steps
Installing is the same as removing, however in the reverse order.
Tightening torque for the fastening screws of the plug-in electronics module (M6 x 16, item
①): 6 Nm
Tightening torque for the PE screw (M4 x 8): 1.8 Nm
Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug connections and ensure that they are secure.
When using connectors with a locking mechanism, make sure that the locking lever is
securely engaged once connected.
The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber optic cables and
sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment (U11, U21, U31).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cable connectors should be labeled prior to disassembly and reinstalled at
their original slot, since it is necessary to re-perform system identification after changing the
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
The screw connections for the protective covers may only be tightened by hand.

11.4.5 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Power Module, frame size GL
Figure 11-3 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Power Module, frame size GL
Preparatory steps

Removal
five connectors).
3. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at -X41 / -X42 / -X46 (max. 6 connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.
Installation steps
①): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.6 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Motor Module, frame size FXL
Figure 11-4 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Motor Module, frame size FXL

Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
2. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (maximum six connectors).
inserted.
3. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card from
4. Remove the retaining screws for the Control Interface Module (two screws).
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect a maximum of five
additional connectors one after the other (two at the top, three below) and the PE
connection (one screw below).
NOTICE
signal cables.

Installation steps
Tightening torque for the fastening screws of the Control Interface Module (M6 x 16, item
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.7 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Active Line Module and Motor
Module, frame size GXL
Figure 11-5 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Active Line Module and Motor Module, frame
size GXL
Preparatory steps

Removal
five connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.
Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

Module, frame size HXL
size HXL
Preparatory steps

Removal
five connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.
Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

Module, frame size JXL
size JXL

Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.
Installation steps
④): 6 Nm

Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.10 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Motor Module, frame size JXL
6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3
Replacing the Control Interface Module of the 6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3 Motor Module
Figure 11-8 Replacing the Control Interface Module, 6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3 Motor Module

Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.

Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

Mounting the second electronic fan

Before installing the replacement part for the Control Interface Module, the second electronic
fan must first be ordered as replacement part and installed.
① Mounting location for the second electronic fan
Figure 11-9 Replacement part, Control Interface Module with an electronic fan

② Fixing screws for the second electronic fan

③ Slots for the power supply of the two electronic fans
Figure 11-10 Replacement part, Control Interface Module with mounted, second electronic fan
The installation is shown in the diagrams above.

1. Mount the second electronic fan at mounting location ①, and attach it using the two fixing
screws ②, tightening torque: 1.8 Nm.
Check the direction of rotation of the fan; arrows on the enclosure show the direction of
rotation - the direction of rotation must be the same as that of the first fan.
2. Insert the connecting cable for the power supply of the second electronic fan at the free slot
of adapter ③.
3. Attach the connecting cable using cable ties, so that the cable cannot come in contact with
the fan blades.

11.4.11 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size FBL
Figure 11-11 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size FBL
Preparatory steps

Removal
1. Disconnect the plugs for the signal cables (two connectors).
2. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42 (maximum five connectors).
inserted.
4. Remove the retaining screws for the Control Interface Module (two screws). The bottom
screw also secures the front electronic fan.
NOTICE
signal cables.
Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.12 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size GBL
Figure 11-12 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size GBL

Preparatory steps
Removal
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.

Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.13 Replacing the electronic fan, Power Module, frame size FL
Replacing the electronic fan
Figure 11-13 Replacing the electronic fan, Power Module, frame size FL
Description
The average service life of the electronic fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the
service life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet
protection, etc.) and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The electronic fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
3. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at -X41 / -X42 / -X46 (maximum 6 connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.
You can then replace the electronic fan for the Control Interface Module.
A description on how to replace the fan is provided here: Replacing the electronic fan of the
Control Interface Module (Page 397).

Installation steps
①): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.14 Replacing the electronic fan, Power Module, frame size GL
Figure 11-14 Replacing the electronic fan, Power Module, frame size GL

Description
Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
3. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at -X41 / -X42 / -X46 (maximum 6 connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.

Installation steps
①): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.15 Replacing the electronic fan, Motor Module, frame size FXL
Figure 11-15 Replacing the electronic fan, Motor Module, frame size FXL

Description
Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.

Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.16 Replacing the electronic fan, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame
size GXL
Figure 11-16 Replacing the electronic fan, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame size GXL

Description
Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.

Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

size HXL
Figure 11-17 Replacing the electronic fan, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame size HXL

Description
Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.

Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

size JXL
Figure 11-18 Replacing the electronic fan, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame size JXL

Description
Preparatory steps
Removal
five connectors).
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.
Note
Both electronic fans must be replaced for Motor Modules with Article No. 6SL3325-1TG41-
6AP3.

Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.19 Replacing the electronic fan, Basic Line Module, frame size FBL
Figure 11-19 Replacing the electronic fan, Basic Line Module, frame size FBL

Description
Preparatory steps
Removal
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.
You can then replace the electronic fans of the Control Interface Module.

Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.20 Replacing the electronic fan, Basic Line Module, frame size GBL
Figure 11-20 Replacing the electronic fan, Basic Line Module, frame size GBL

Description
Preparatory steps
Removal
inserted.
NOTICE
signal cables.
You can then replace the electronic fans of the Control Interface Module.

Installation steps
④): 6 Nm
Note
be observed.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

11.4.21 Replacing the electronic fan of the Control Interface Module
Replacing the electronic fan of the Control Interface Module
① Slot for the fan power supply for versions equipped with an electronic fan
② Fixing screws for the first electronic fan
③ Slot for the fan power supply for versions equipped with two electronic fans
④ Fixing screws for the second electronic fan
Figure 11-21 Replacing the electronic fan of the Control Interface Module
Preparatory steps
• Remove the Control Interface Module of the corresponding device (see the relevant
description)

Replacement
The replacement procedure is shown in the previous diagram.
Version with one electronic fan

1. Withdraw the connector for the fan power supply ①.
2. Remove the fan fixing screws ② and withdraw the fan from the Control Interface Module.
Note the fan direction of rotation - the appropriate arrows are stamped on the housing.
3. Mount the new electronic fan at the original location, fix it with the two fixing screws ②
(tightening torque: 1.8 Nm).
Check the arrows on the fan housing – they must match the alignment of the replaced fan.
4. Insert the connecting cable for the power supply of the electronic fan at slot ①.
the fan blades.
Version with two electronic fans

1. Withdraw the connectors for the fan power supply ③.
2. Remove the fixing screws ②, ④ of the fans and withdraw the fans from the Control
Interface Module.
Note the fan direction of rotation, it is shown in the form of arrows on the housing.
3. Mount the new electronic fans at their original locations, fix them using the two fixing
screws ②, ④ (tightening torque: 1.8 Nm).
Check the arrows on the fan housing – they must match the alignment of the replaced fans.
4. Connect the connecting cables for the fan power supply of the electronic fans at slots ③.
the fan blades.

11.4.22 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size GI
Replacing the fan
Figure 11-22 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size GI

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.
Preparatory steps
• Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply.
Removal
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan unit (3 screws).
2. Unplug connector –X630.
You can now carefully remove the fan.
NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.
Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
be observed.

11.4.23 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size HI
Replacing the fan
Figure 11-23 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size HI

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.
Preparatory steps
Removal
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan unit (3 screws).
2. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.
NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.
Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
be observed.

11.5 Forming the DC link capacitors
Description
If the Power Module, Basic Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module have not
been used for more than two years, the DC link capacitors must be reformed. If this is not
carried out, the units could be damaged after the DC link voltage is applied under load.
If the cabinet is commissioned within two years of its date of manufacture, the DC link
capacitors do not need to be reformed. The date of manufacture can be taken from the serial
number on the rating plate.
Note
Storage period
It is important that the storage period is calculated from the date of manufacture and not
from the date that the equipment was shipped.
Rating plate
Figure 11-24 Nameplate using an Active Line Module as example

Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture can be determined as follows:
Table 11- 2 Production year and month
Character Year of manufacture Character Month of manufacture

A 2010 1 ... 9 January to September
B 2011 O October
C 2012 N November
D 2013 D December
E 2014
F 2015
H 2016
J 2017
K 2018
L 2019
M 2020
N 2021
P 2022
R 2023
Procedure in the event of repair or replacement

A replacement Line Module or Motor Module or the corresponding replacement power block
has to be reformed after being in storage for a period of more than two years.
The DC link capacitors are reformed by applying the rated voltage without load for at least 30
minutes.
To do this, the DC link must be precharged (i.e. the Line Modules switched on), while the
controller for the existing Motor Modules must not be enabled for the specified length of
time.
Procedure for reforming outside the drive line-up

Replacement power units which have to be held ready for immediate use in the event of
repair or replacement can also be reformed individually and outside the drive line-up.
For this, the equipment must be connected to the forming circuits described in the following.
Components for the forming circuit (recommendation)
• 1 fuse switch 3-phase 400 V / 10 A or 690 V / 10 A
• 3 incandescent lamps 230 V / 100 W for a line voltage of 3 AC 380 to 480 V.
Alternatively, use 3 resistors of 1 kΩ / 100 W each (e.g. GWK150J1001KLX000 from
Vishay) instead of the incandescent lamps.

• 6 incandescent lamps 230 V / 100 W for a line voltage of 3 AC 500 to 690 V, where 2
incandescent lamps must be connected in series in each supply phase.
Alternatively, use 3 resistors of 1 kΩ / 160 W each (e.g. GWK200J1001KLX000 from
Vishay) instead of the incandescent lamps.
• Various small components, such as lamp sockets, cable 1.5 mm2, etc.
WARNING
Electric shock when lamp sockets are installed so that they are not insulated
If two incandescent lamps connected in series are used, the insulation of the lamp
sockets is not rated for the high voltage of 500 to 690 V 3 ph AC.
• For a line voltage of 3 AC 500 to 690 V, install the two lamp sockets connected in
series with insulation and protect them from being touched.
Forming circuit for Line Modules
Note
Forming the Line Modules
Voltage must be supplied to Line Modules via a connected Motor Module and the associated
DC link.
Figure 11-25 Forming circuit for Line Modules

11.6 Recycling and disposal
Forming circuit for Motor Modules
Figure 11-26 Forming circuit for Motor Modules
Procedure
• It is not permissible that the device being formed receives a power-on command (e.g.
from the keyboard, BOP20 or terminal block).
• Connect the appropriate forming circuit.
• Forming has been completed if the DC link voltage no longer increases.
11.6 Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a
company certified for the disposal of old electrical and electronic devices and dispose of the
device in accordance with the regulations in your country.

Appendix A
A.1 Cable lugs
Cable lugs
The cable connections on the devices are designed for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 or
DIN 46235.
For connection of alternative cable lugs, the maximum dimensions are listed in the table
below.
These cable lugs are not to exceed these dimensions, as mechanical fastening and adherence
to the voltage distances is not guaranteed otherwise.
Figure A-1 Dimensions of the cable lugs
Table A- 1 Dimensions of the cable lugs
Screw / bolts Connection cross- d2 b l c1 c2

section [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
[mm²]
M8 70 8.4 24 55 13 10
M10 185 10.5 37 82 15 12
M10 240 13 42 92 16 13
M12 95 13 28 65 16 13
M12 185 13 37 82 16 13
M12 240 13 42 92 16 13
M16 240 17 42 92 19 16

Appendix
A.1 Cable lugs
Attaching 2 cable lugs per phase

The cable lugs can be attached as shown in the following diagram if 2 cable lugs must be
connected at each phase connection.
Figure A-2 2 cable lugs per connection

Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Note
The following list of abbreviations includes all abbreviations and their meanings used in the
entire SINAMICS family of drives.
Abbreviation Derivation of abbreviation Meaning

A
A… Alarm Alarm
AC Alternating Current Alternating current
ADC Analog Digital Converter Analog digital converter
AI Analog Input Analog input
AIM Active Interface Module Active Interface Module
ALM Active Line Module Active Line Module
AO Analog Output Analog output
AOP Advanced Operator Panel Advanced Operator Panel
APC Advanced Positioning Control Advanced Positioning Control
AR Automatic Restart Automatic restart
ASC Armature Short-Circuit Armature short-circuit
ASCII American Standard Code for Information American coding standard for the exchange of
Interchange information
AS-i AS-Interface (Actuator Sensor Interface) AS-Interface (open bus system in automation tech-
nology)
ASM Asynchronmotor Induction motor
AVS Active Vibration Suppression Active vibration suppression
B
BB Betriebsbedingung Operating condition
BERO - Contactless proximity switch
BI Binector Input Binector input
BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für BG Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Arbeitssicherheit
BICO Binector Connector Technology Binector connector technology
BLM Basic Line Module Basic Line Module
BO Binector Output Binector output
BOP Basic Operator Panel Basic Operator Panel
C
C Capacitance Capacitance
C… - Safety message
CAN Controller Area Network Serial bus system
CBC Communication Board CAN Communication board CAN
CBE Communication Board Ethernet PROFINET communication module (Ethernet)
CD Compact Disc Compact disc
CDS Command Data Set Command data set
CF Card CompactFlash Card CompactFlash card
CI Connector Input Connector input
CLC Clearance Control Clearance control
CNC Computerized Numerical Control Computerized numerical control
CO Connector Output Connector output

Appendix

CO/BO Connector Output/Binector Output Connector output/binector output
COB-ID CAN Object-Identification CAN object identification
CoL Certificate of License Certificate of License
COM Common contact of a change-over relay Common contact of a change-over relay
COMM Commissioning Commissioning
CP Communication Processor Communications processor
CPU Central Processing Unit Central processing unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Cyclic redundancy check
CSM Control Supply Module Control Supply Module
CU Control Unit Control Unit
CUA Control Unit Adapter Control Unit Adapter
CUD Control Unit DC Control Unit DC
D
DAC Digital Analog Converter Digital analog converter
DC Direct Current Direct current
DCB Drive Control Block Drive Control Block
DCBRK DC Brake DC braking
DCC Drive Control Chart Drive Control Chart
DCN Direct Current Negative Direct current negative
DCP Direct Current Positive Direct current positive
DDC Dynamic Drive Control Dynamic Drive Control
DDS Drive Data Set Drive Data Set
DI Digital Input Digital input
DI/DO Digital Input/Digital Output Digital input/output, bidirectional
DMC DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet
DME DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External
DMM Double Motor Module Double Motor Module
DO Digital Output Digital output
DO Drive Object Drive object
DP Decentralized Peripherals Decentralized peripherals
DPRAM Dual Ported Random Access Memory Dual-Port Random Access Memory
DQ DRIVE-CLiQ DRIVE-CLiQ
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory Dynamic Random Access Memory
DRIVE-CLiQ Drive Component Link with IQ Drive Component Link with IQ
DSC Dynamic Servo Control Dynamic Servo Control
DSM Doppelsubmodul Double submodule
DTC Digital Time Clock Timer
E
EASC External Armature Short-Circuit External armature short-circuit
EDS Encoder Data Set Encoder data set
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only
Memory Memory
EGB Elektrostatisch gefährdete Baugruppen Electrostatically sensitive devices
EIP EtherNet/IP EtherNet Industrial Protocol (real-time Ethernet)
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Residual current operated circuit breaker
ELP Earth Leakage Protection Ground-fault monitoring
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive Force Electromotive force
EMK Elektromotorische Kraft Electromotive force
EMV Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit Electromagnetic compatibility

Appendix

EN Europäische Norm European standard
EnDat Encoder-Data-Interface Encoder interface
EP Enable Pulses Pulse enable
EPOS Einfachpositionierer Basic positioner
ES Engineering System Engineering system
ESB Ersatzschaltbild Equivalent circuit diagram
ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Devices Electrostatically sensitive devices
ESM Essential Service Mode Essential service mode
ESR Extended Stop and Retract Extended stop and retract
F
F… Fault Fault
FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Frequently Asked Questions
FBLOCKS Free Blocks Free function blocks
FCC Function Control Chart Function control chart
FCC Flux Current Control Flux current control
FD Function Diagram Function diagram
F-DI Failsafe Digital Input Fail-safe digital input
F-DO Failsafe Digital Output Fail-safe digital output
FEPROM Flash-EPROM Non-volatile write and read memory
FG Function Generator Function generator
FI - Fault current
FOC Fiber-Optic Cable Fiber-optic cable
FP Funktionsplan Function diagram
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array Field Programmable Gate Array
FW Firmware Firmware
G
GB Gigabyte Gigabyte
GC Global Control Global control telegram (broadcast telegram)
GND Ground Reference potential for all signal and operating
voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also referred to as
M)
GSD Gerätestammdatei Generic Station Description: Describes the features
of a PROFIBUS slave
GSV Gate Supply Voltage Gate supply voltage
GUID Globally Unique Identifier Globally Unique Identifier
H
HF High frequency High frequency
HFD Hochfrequenzdrossel Radio frequency reactor
HLA Hydraulic Linear Actuator Hydraulic linear actuator
HLG Hochlaufgeber Ramp-function generator
HM Hydraulic Module Hydraulic Module
HMI Human Machine Interface Human Machine Interface
HTL High-Threshold Logic Logic with high interference threshold
HW Hardware Hardware
I
i. V. In Vorbereitung Under development: This property is currently not
available
I/O Input/Output Input/output
I2C Inter-Integrated Circuit Internal serial data bus
IASC Internal Armature Short-Circuit Internal armature short-circuit

Appendix

IBN Inbetriebnahme Commissioning
ID Identifier Identification
IE Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Interface Interface
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IGCT Integrated Gate-Controlled Thyristor Semiconductor power switch with integrated con-
trol electrode
IL Impulslöschung Pulse suppression
IP Internet Protocol Internet Protocol
IPO Interpolator Interpolator
IT Isolé Terre Non-grounded three-phase line supply
IVP Internal Voltage Protection Internal voltage protection
J
JOG Jogging Jogging
K
KDV Kreuzweiser Datenvergleich Data cross-check
KHP Know-how protection Know-how protection
KIP Kinetische Pufferung Kinetic buffering
Kp - Proportional gain
KTY84-130 - Temperature sensor
L
L - Symbol for inductance
LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode
LIN Linearmotor Linear motor
LR Lageregler Position controller
LSB Least Significant Bit Least significant bit
LSC Line-Side Converter Line-side converter
LSS Line-Side Switch Line-side switch
LU Length Unit Length unit
LWL Lichtwellenleiter Fiber-optic cable
M
M - Symbol for torque
M Masse Reference potential for all signal and operating
voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also referred to as
GND)
MB Megabyte Megabyte
MCC Motion Control Chart Motion Control Chart
MDI Manual Data Input Manual data input
MDS Motor Data Set Motor data set
MLFB Maschinenlesbare Fabrikatebezeichnung Machine-readable product code
MM Motor Module Motor Module
MMC Man-Machine Communication Man-machine communication
MMC Micro Memory Card Micro memory card
MSB Most Significant Bit Most significant bit
MSC Motor-Side Converter Motor-side converter
MSCY_C1 Master Slave Cycle Class 1 Cyclic communication between master (class 1)
and slave
MSR Motorstromrichter Motor-side converter
MT Messtaster Probe

Appendix

N
N. C. Not Connected Not connected
N… No Report No report or internal message
NAMUR Normenarbeitsgemeinschaft für Mess- und Regel- Standardization association for measurement and
technik in der chemischen Industrie control in chemical industries
NC Normally Closed (contact) NC contact
NC Numerical Control Numerical control
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standardization association in USA (United States
of America)
NM Nullmarke Zero mark
NO Normally Open (contact) NO contact
NSR Netzstromrichter Line-side converter
NTP Network Time Protocol Standard for synchronization of the time of day
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory Non-volatile read/write memory
O
OA Open Architecture Software component which provides additional
functions for the SINAMICS drive system
OAIF Open Architecture Interface Version of the SINAMICS firmware as of which the
OA application can be used
OASP Open Architecture Support Package Expands the commissioning tool by the corre-
sponding OA application
OC Operating Condition Operating condition
OCC One Cable Connection One-cable technology
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer Original equipment manufacturer
OLP Optical Link Plug Bus connector for fiber-optic cable
OMI Option Module Interface Option Module Interface
P
p… - Adjustable parameters
P1 Processor 1 CPU 1
P2 Processor 2 CPU 2
PB PROFIBUS PROFIBUS
PcCtrl PC Control Master control
PD PROFIdrive PROFIdrive
PDC Precision Drive Control Precision Drive Control
PDS Power unit Data Set Power unit data set
PDS Power Drive System Drive system
PE Protective Earth Protective ground
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage Protective extra low voltage
PFH Probability of dangerous failure per hour Probability of dangerous failure per hour
PG Programmiergerät Programming device
PI Proportional Integral Proportional integral
PID Proportional Integral Differential Proportional integral differential
PLC Programmable Logical Controller Programmable logic controller
PLL Phase-Locked Loop Phase-locked loop
PM Power Module Power Module
PMI Power Module Interface Power Module Interface
PMSM Permanent-magnet synchronous motor Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
PN PROFINET PROFINET
PNO PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation PROFIBUS user organization
PPI Point to Point Interface Point-to-point interface

Appendix

PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Signal White noise
PROFIBUS Process Field Bus Serial data bus
PS Power Supply Power supply
PSA Power Stack Adapter Power Stack Adapter
PT1000 - Temperature sensor
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient Positive temperature coefficient
PTP Point To Point Point-to-point
PWM Pulse Width Modulation Pulse width modulation
PZD Prozessdaten Process data
Q
R
r… - Display parameters (read-only)
RAM Random Access Memory Memory for reading and writing
RCCB Residual Current Circuit Breaker Residual current operated circuit breaker
RCD Residual Current Device Residual current device
RCM Residual Current Monitor Residual current monitor
REL Reluctance motor textile Reluctance motor textile
RESM Reluctance synchronous motor Synchronous reluctance motor
RFG Ramp-Function Generator Ramp-function generator
RJ45 Registered Jack 45 Term for an 8-pin socket system for data transmis-
sion with shielded or non-shielded multi-wire cop-
per cables
RKA Rückkühlanlage Cooling unit
RLM Renewable Line Module Renewable Line Module
RO Read Only Read only
ROM Read-Only Memory Read-only memory
RPDO Receive Process Data Object Receive Process Data Object
RS232 Recommended Standard 232 Interface standard for cable-connected serial data
transmission between a sender and receiver (also
known as EIA232)
RS485 Recommended Standard 485 Interface standard for a cable-connected differen-
tial, parallel, and/or serial bus system (data trans-
mission between a number of senders and
receivers, also known as EIA485)
RTC Real Time Clock Real-time clock
RZA Raumzeigerapproximation Space-vector approximation
S
S1 - Continuous operation
S3 - Intermittent duty
SAM Safe Acceleration Monitor Safe acceleration monitoring
SBC Safe Brake Control Safe brake control
SBH Sicherer Betriebshalt Safe operating stop
SBR Safe Brake Ramp Safe brake ramp monitoring
SBT Safe Brake Test Safe brake test
SCA Safe Cam Safe cam
SCC Safety Control Channel Safety Control Channel
SCSE Single Channel Safety Encoder Single-channel safety encoder
SD Card SecureDigital Card Secure digital memory card
SDC Standard Drive Control Standard Drive Control
SDI Safe Direction Safe motion direction
SE Sicherer Software-Endschalter Safe software limit switch

Appendix

SESM Separately-excited synchronous motor Separately excited synchronous motor
SG Sicher reduzierte Geschwindigkeit Safely limited speed
SGA Sicherheitsgerichteter Ausgang Safety-related output
SGE Sicherheitsgerichteter Eingang Safety-related input
SH Sicherer Halt Safe stop
SI Safety Integrated Safety Integrated
SIC Safety Info Channel Safety Info Channel
SIL Safety Integrity Level Safety Integrity Level
SITOP - Siemens power supply system
SLA Safely-Limited Acceleration Safely limited acceleration
SLM Smart Line Module Smart Line Module
SLP Safely-Limited Position Safely Limited Position
SLS Safely-Limited Speed Safely limited speed
SLVC Sensorless Vector Control Sensorless vector control
SM Sensor Module Sensor Module
SMC Sensor Module Cabinet Sensor Module Cabinet
SME Sensor Module External Sensor Module External
SMI SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
SMM Single Motor Module Single Motor Module
SN Sicherer Software-Nocken Safe software cam
SOS Safe Operating Stop Safe operating stop
SP Service Pack Service pack
SP Safe Position Safe position
SPC Setpoint Channel Setpoint channel
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface Serial peripheral interface
SPS Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung Programmable logic controller
SS1 Safe Stop 1 Safe Stop 1 (time-monitored, ramp-monitored)
SS1E Safe Stop 1 External Safe Stop 1 with external stop
SS2 Safe Stop 2 Safe Stop 2
SS2E Safe Stop 2 External Safe Stop 2 with external stop
SSI Synchronous Serial Interface Synchronous serial interface
SSL Secure Sockets Layer Encryption protocol for secure data transfer (new
TLS)
SSM Safe Speed Monitor Safe feedback from speed monitor
SSP SINAMICS Support Package SINAMICS support package
STO Safe Torque Off Safe torque off
STW Steuerwort Control word
T
TB Terminal Board Terminal Board
TEC Technology Extension Software component which is installed as an addi-
tional technology package and which expands the
functionality of SINAMICS (previously OA applica-
tion)
TIA Totally Integrated Automation Totally Integrated Automation
TLS Transport Layer Security Encryption protocol for secure data transfer (previ-
ously SSL)
TM Terminal Module Terminal Module
TN Terre Neutre Grounded three-phase line supply
Tn - Integral time
TPDO Transmit Process Data Object Transmit Process Data Object

Appendix

TSN Time-Sensitive Networking Time-Sensitive Networking
TT Terre Terre Grounded three-phase line supply
TTL Transistor-Transistor-Logic Transistor-transistor logic
Tv - Rate time
U
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Uninterruptible power supply
USV Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung Uninterruptible power supply
UTC Universal Time Coordinated Universal time coordinated
V
VC Vector Control Vector control
Vdc - DC link voltage
VdcN - Partial DC link voltage negative
VdcP - Partial DC link voltage positive
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker Association of German Electrical Engineers
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure Association of German Engineers
VPM Voltage Protection Module Voltage Protection Module
Vpp Volt peak to peak Volt peak to peak
VSM Voltage Sensing Module Voltage Sensing Module
W
WEA Wiedereinschaltautomatik Automatic restart
WZM Werkzeugmaschine Machine tool
X
XML Extensible Markup Language Extensible markup language (standard language
for Web publishing and document management)
Y
Z
ZK Zwischenkreis DC link
ZM Zero Mark Zero mark
ZSW Zustandswort Status word

Index
Connection example
Active Interface Modules, 64
" Motor Modules, 205
Power Modules, 121
"Siemens Industry Online Support" app, 11
Connection methods, 339
Control Interface Module
6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3 Motor Module, replacing, 363
A
Frame size FBL, replacing, 368
Active Interface Modules Frame size FL, replacing, 349
Air-cooled, 58 Frame size FXL, replacing, 353
Dimension drawing, 70 Frame size GBL, replacing, 370
Liquid-cooled, 80 Frame size GL, replacing, 351
Active Interface Modules, liquid-cooled Frame size GXL, replacing, 356
Dimension drawing, filter module, 93 Frame size HXL, replacing, 358
Dimension drawing, filter reactor, 92 Frame size JXL, replacing, 360
Active Line Modules, 164 Coolant connection, 303
Dimension drawing, 181 Coolant definition, 328
Antifreeze, 330, 330 Coolant properties, 328
Antifrogen L, 320 Cooling circuit configuration, 312
Antifrogen N, 313 Cooling circuit for aluminum heat sinks, 308
Cooling circuit for stainless steel heat sinks, 310
Crane lifting lugs, 131, 186, 218
B
Basic Line Modules, 140
D
Dimension drawing, 153
Basic structure Data matrix code, 11
and regulated infeed, 47 Derating factors
and unregulated infeed, 48 As a function of installation altitude, 41
with Power Module, 46 Current derating as a function of the pulse
Basic structure of a drive system with liquid-cooled frequency, 137, 236
SINAMICS S120, 46 Dependency on ambient temperature, 40
Biocides, 330 Dependency on coolant temperature, 39
Function of installation altitude and ambient
temperature, 78
C Dimension drawing
Cabinet design and EMC, 291
Active Interface Modules, liquid-cooled, filter
Cable lugs, 407
module, 93
2 cable lugs per phase, 408
Active Interface Modules, liquid-cooled, filter
Back-to-back, 408
reactor, 92
Cavitation, 311
Active Line Modules, 181
Checking for leaks, 344
Cleaning, 344
dV/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 282
Commissioning the cooling circuit, 340
dV/dt reactor, 263
Connection
Line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 55
dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 279
Line reactors for Power Modules, 51
dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 261
Motor Modules, 212
Motor reactors, 249

Index
Power Modules, 128 G

Sine-wave filter, 244
General Data Protection Regulation, 18
Voltage peak limiter, 266
Disconnect the basic interference suppression
module, 72, 108, 133, 157
H
Disposal, 406
Dowcal 100, 313 Horizontal installation, 301
dv/dt filter, 255 Hotline, 14
dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 272 Housing for air guidance, 301
Connection, 279
dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter
Interfaces, 276 I
dV/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter
Inhibitors, 330
Installation
dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter
Connection, 261
dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter
Motor Modules, 217
Interfaces, 259
Power Modules, 130
dV/dt reactor
Interfaces
dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, 276
dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter, 259
E
IT system, 72, 108, 133, 157
Electromagnetic fields, 22
Electronic fan
Frame size FBL, replacing, 391 L
Frame size FL, replacing, 373
LEDs
Frame size FXL, replacing, 379
Active Interface Modules, 69, 91
Frame size GBL, replacing, 394
Frame size GL, replacing, 376
Frame size GXL, replacing, 382
Motor Modules, 211
Frame size HXL, replacing, 385
Power Modules, 127
Frame size JXL, replacing, 388
Lifting lug, 156
Electronic fan, Control Interface Module
Line Modules, 139
Replacing, 397
Electrostatic sensitive devices, 25
EMC
General information, 291
Equipotential bonding, 327
F
Active Interface Modules, air-cooled, 58
Fan Active Interface Modules, liquid-cooled, 80
Frame size GI, replacement, 399 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 53
Frame size HI, replacement, 401 Line reactors for Power Modules, 49
FAQs, 10 List of abbreviations, 409
Forming the DC link capacitors, 403
SINAMICS hardware, 19 M
Maintenance, 343, 345
Maintenance and servicing, 343

Index
Materials, 333 Recycling, 406

Maximum cable lengths, 292 Replacement
Motor connection cover, 302 Automatic firmware update, 347
Motor Modules, 197 Electronic fan, Control Interface Module, 397
Dimension drawing, 212 Error messages, 346
Minimum cable length, 238 Replacing
Parallel connection, 238 Control Interface Module, 6SL3325-1TG41-6AP3
Motor reactors, 246 Motor Module, 363
Dimension drawing, 249 Control Interface Module, frame size FBL, 368
Motor-side power components, 241 Control Interface Module, frame size FL, 349
dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 272 Control Interface Module, frame size FXL, 353
dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 255 Control Interface Module, frame size GBL, 370
Motor reactors, 246 Control Interface Module, frame size GL, 351
Sine-wave filter, 241 Control Interface Module, frame size GXL, 356
Mounting equipment for power units, 347 Control Interface Module, frame size HXL, 358
Mounting on mounting rails, 295 Control Interface Module, frame size JXL, 360
Electronic fan, frame size FBL, 391
Electronic fan, frame size FL, 373
N Electronic fan, frame size FXL, 379
Electronic fan, frame size GBL, 394
Non-grounded line supply, 72, 108, 133, 157
Electronic fan, frame size GL, 376
Electronic fan, frame size GXL, 382
Electronic fan, frame size HXL, 385
O
Electronic fan, frame size JXL, 388
Operation on a non-grounded line Fan, frame size GI, 399
supply, 72, 108, 133, 157 Fan, frame size HI, 401
Overload capability Basic Line Modules, 163 Replacing components, 346
High overload, 163 Residual risks, 27
Overload capability of Active Line Modules, 196
High overload, 196
Overload capability of Power Modules, 135 S
High overload, 136
Safety information
Low overload, 136
EMC, 291
Overload capability of the Motor Modules, 234
Safety instructions
High overload, 235
Active Interface Modules, air-cooled, 60
Low overload, 234
Active Interface Modules, liquid-cooled, 81
P
Control cabinet design, 291
Parallel connection dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 274
Motor Modules, 238 dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 257
Power Modules Electromagnetic fields, 22
Dimension drawing, 128 Electrostatic sensitive devices, 25
Power units General safety instructions, 19
Mounting equipment, 347 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 53
Preventing cavitation, 311 Line reactors for Power Modules, 49
Protection guard, 130, 155, 185, 217 Maintenance and servicing, 343
Motor Modules, 199
Motor reactors, 247
R Power Modules, 117
Rating plate, 403
Service, 342

Index
Service for the cooling circuit, 344

Siemens Industry Online Support
App, 11
Standards, 43
Support, 14
System overview, 29
T
Technical data
Derating factors, 78
dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 287
dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 269
General technical data, 36
Motor reactors, 252
Power Modules, 134
Technical support, 14
Tightening torques, 345
Tool, 345
Transport fixtures, 94
V
Venting the heat sink, 340
Vertical installation, 294
Volumetric air flow and fans required, 302
W
Web sites of third-party companies, 11


SINAMICS S120 Chassis Power Units Liquid Cooled en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SINAMICS S120 Chassis Power Units Liquid Cooled en-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SINAMICS S120 Chassis Power Units Liquid Cooled en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Cabinet design and EMC 9

Maintenance and servicing 11

Siemens AG Document order number: 6SL3097-4AM00-0BP9 Copyright © Siemens AG 2006 - 2021.

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

4.2.3 Dimension drawing............................................................................................................ 55

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

5.3.6 X42 terminal strip ............................................................................................................ 124

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

6.3.5 Installation ...................................................................................................................... 185

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

11.4 Replacing components..................................................................................................... 346

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Drive Technology Configurator

Questions relating to the technical documentation

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Siemens Support for on the move

Data matrix code data on the rating plate

Web sites of third-party companies

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

1.2 Usage phases and their documents/tools (as an example)

Usage phase Tools

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

1.3 Where can the various topics be found?

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

1.4 Training and support

1.5 Directives, standards, certificates

Relevant directives and standards

Certificates for download

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Standards that are not relevant

China Compulsory Certification

EMC limit values for South Korea

Information on product-related environmental protection

1.6 Additional information

Ensuring reliable operation

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Use of third-party products

Connection for function potential bonding

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

1.7 General Data Protection Regulation

Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

2.2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

2.3 Industrial security

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

2.4 Residual risks of power drive systems

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Liquid-cooled chassis power units

Figure 3-1 SINAMICS as part of the Siemens modular automation system